Volvo Automobile 2008 C70 User Manual

VOLVO C70  
owner’s manual  
WEB EDITION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
00 Introduction  
01 Safety  
02 Instruments and controls  
Introduction ........................................6  
Seatbelts .......................................... 12  
Airbag system .................................. 15  
Airbags (SRS) ................................... 16  
Overview, left-hand drive car ............34  
Overview, right-hand drive car ..........36  
Driver’s door control panel ...............38  
Combined instrument panel .............39  
Indicator and warning symbols .........40  
Information display ...........................44  
Electrical socket ................................45  
Lighting panel ...................................46  
Left-hand stalk switch ......................48  
Right-hand stalk switch ....................50  
Cruise control (option) ......................52  
Steering wheel keypad (option) ........53  
Volvo Car Corporation and the  
environment ........................................7  
Activating/deactivating the  
airbag (SRS) ..................................... 18  
Side airbags (SIPS bags) .................. 20  
Inflatable Curtain (IC) ....................... 22  
WHIPS .............................................. 23  
Roll-Over Protection System  
(ROPS) .............................................. 25  
When the systems deploy ................ 26  
Crash mode ...................................... 27  
Child safety ...................................... 28  
Steering wheel adjustment, hazard  
warning flashers ................................54  
Parking brake ....................................55  
Power windows .................................56  
Rearview and door mirrors ...............57  
Personal preferences ........................61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
Contents  
03 Climate control  
04 Interior  
05 Locks and alarm  
General information on climate  
Front seats ........................................76  
Electrically operated roof ..................79  
Wind deflector (option) .....................83  
Interior lighting ..................................84  
Remote control with key blade .........96  
Active locks ......................................99  
Privacy locking (option) ..................100  
Keyless drive (option) ..................... 102  
Battery in remote control ................ 105  
Locking and unlocking ................... 106  
Alarm (option) ................................. 110  
control .............................................. 66  
Electronic climate control, ECC ....... 68  
Air distribution .................................. 71  
Fuel-driven heater (option) ............... 72  
Storage spaces in the passenger  
compartment ....................................86  
Cargo area ........................................90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Contents  
06 Starting and driving  
07 Wheels and tyres  
08 Car care  
General ........................................... 154  
Tyre pressure .................................. 158  
Cleaning ..........................................170  
Touching up paintwork ....................173  
Rustproofing ................................... 174  
General ........................................... 116  
Refuelling ........................................ 118  
Starting the engine ......................... 119  
Diesel particle filter (DPF) ............... 120  
Ignition switch and steering lock .... 121  
Keyless drive .................................. 122  
Manual gearbox .............................. 123  
Automatic gearbox ......................... 125  
Brake system .................................. 128  
Warning triangle and spare  
wheel .............................................. 160  
Changing wheels ............................ 162  
Emergency puncture repair ............ 164  
DSTC – Stability and traction  
control system ................................ 130  
Parking assistance (option) ............. 132  
BLIS – Blind Spot Information  
System (option) ............................... 135  
Towing and recovery ....................... 138  
Jump starting ................................. 140  
Driving with a trailer ........................ 141  
Towing equipment .......................... 143  
Detachable towbar ......................... 145  
Loading ........................................... 150  
Adjusting headlamp pattern ........... 151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Contents  
09 Maintenance and service  
10 Infotainment system  
11 Specifications  
Volvo service .................................. 178  
Self-maintenance ........................... 179  
Bonnet and engine compartment .. 180  
Diesel .............................................. 181  
Oils and fluids ................................ 182  
Wiper blades .................................. 187  
Battery ............................................ 188  
Replacing bulbs ............................. 190  
Fuses .............................................. 196  
Type designation .............................232  
Dimensions and weights ................233  
Engine specifications ..................... 235  
Engine oil ........................................237  
Fluids and lubricants ......................241  
Fuel .................................................242  
Catalytic converter .........................244  
Electrical system ............................245  
Type approval .................................247  
General ...........................................206  
Audio functions ...............................207  
Radio functions ...............................211  
CD functions ...................................215  
Menu structure – audio system ......217  
Phone functions (option) .................218  
Menu structure – phone ..................225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Introduction  
Introduction  
Owner’s Manual  
NOTE  
A good way of getting to know your new car  
is to read the owner’s manual, ideally before  
your first journey. This will give you the  
opportunity to familiarise yourself with new  
functions, to see how best to handle the car  
in different situations, and to make the best  
use of all the car’s features. Please pay  
attention to the safety instructions contained  
in the manual:  
Volvo cars are adapted for the varying  
requirements of different markets, as well  
as for national or local legal requirements  
and regulations. If you are uncertain over  
what is standard, an option or an accessory  
then contact your Volvo dealer.  
The specifications, design features and illus-  
trations in this owner’s manual are not bind-  
ing. We reserve the right to make modifica-  
tions without prior notice.  
WARNING  
© Volvo Car Corporation  
"Warning!" texts indicate where there is a  
risk of personal injury in the event of the  
instructions not being followed.  
IMPORTANT  
"Important!" texts indicate a risk of damage  
to the car in the event of the instructions not  
being followed.  
The equipment described in the owner’s  
manual is not present in all models. In addi-  
tion to standard equipment, this manual also  
describes options (factory fitted equipment)  
and certain accessories (extra equipment).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
Introduction  
Volvo Car Corporation and the environment  
Volvo Cars’ environmental philosophy  
Environmental care, safety and quality are  
the three core values which influence all  
operations of the Volvo Car Corporation. We  
also believe that our customers share our  
consideration for the environment.  
other units. We also set requirements for our  
partners so that they work systematically  
with environmental issues.  
lower emission of the greenhouse gas, car-  
bon dioxide.  
It is possible for the driver to influence fuel  
consumption. For more information read  
under the heading Reducing environmental  
impact on page 8.  
EPI (Environmental Product Information) is  
supplied for all Volvo models. Here you can  
see how the environment is affected during  
the entire lifecycle of the car.  
Your Volvo complies with strict international  
environmental standards and is also manu-  
factured in one of the cleanest and most  
resource-efficient plants in the world.  
Read more at www.volvocars.com/EPI.  
Volvo Car Corporation has global ISO certifi-  
cation, which includes the environmental  
standard (ISO 14001) covering factories,  
central functions, as well as several of our  
Fuel consumption  
Volvo cars have competitive fuel consump-  
tion in each of their respective classes.  
Lower fuel consumption generally results in  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Introduction  
Volvo Car Corporation and the environment  
Efficient emission control  
Textile standard  
Reducing environmental impact  
Your Volvo is manufactured following the  
concept Clean inside and out – a concept  
that encompasses a clean interior environ-  
ment as well as highly efficient emission con-  
trol. In many cases the exhaust emissions are  
well below the applicable standards.  
The interior of a Volvo is designed to be  
pleasant and comfortable, even for people  
with contact allergies and for asthma suffer-  
ers. All of our upholstery and interior textiles  
are tested with respect to certain unhealthy  
substances and allergens as well as emis-  
sions. This means that all textiles fulfil the  
requirements in the Öko-Tex 100 standard ,  
a major advance towards a healthier passen-  
ger compartment environment.  
You can easily help reduce environmental  
impact, for example, by driving economically,  
by purchasing eco-labelled car care prod-  
ucts and by servicing and maintaining the car  
in accordance with the instructions in the  
owner’s manual.  
The following hints will help you to do your bit  
for the environment (for further advice on  
how you can reduce environmental impact  
and drive economically, see page 116).  
Clean air in the passenger  
compartment  
A passenger compartment filter prevents  
dust and pollen from entering the passenger  
compartment via the air intake.  
2
Öko-Tex certification covers seatbelts, car-  
pets and fabrics for example. The leather in  
the upholstery undergoes chromium-free  
tanning with natural plant substances and  
fulfils the certification requirements.  
• Decrease fuel consumption by choosing  
ECO tyre pressure, see page 158.  
1
A sophisticated air quality system, IAQS  
• Remove unnecessary items from the car -  
the greater the load the higher the fuel  
consumption.  
(Interior Air Quality System) ensures that the  
incoming air is cleaner than the air in the traf-  
fic outside.  
Volvo workshops and the environment  
• Is your car equipped with an engine block  
heater? If so, use it for a few hours before  
starting from cold to reduce fuel con-  
sumption and exhaust emissions.  
The system consists of an electronic sensor  
and a carbon filter. The incoming air is moni-  
tored continuously and if there is an increase  
in the level of certain unhealthy gases such  
as carbon monoxide then the air intake is  
closed. Such a situation may arise in heavy  
traffic, queues and tunnels for example.  
Regular maintenance creates the conditions  
for a long service life and low fuel consump-  
tion for your car, and in this way you contrib-  
ute to a cleaner environment. When Volvo’s  
workshops are entrusted with the service  
and maintenance of your car it becomes part  
of our system. We make clear demands  
regarding the way in which our workshops  
are designed in order to prevent spills and  
discharges into the environment. Our work-  
shop staff have the knowledge and the tools  
required to guarantee good environmental  
care.  
• Drive gently and avoid braking too hard.  
• Drive in the highest gear  
possible. Low engine  
speeds result in lower fuel  
consumption.  
The entry of nitrous oxides, ground-level  
ozone and hydrocarbons is prevented by the  
carbon filter.  
• Use engine braking to  
slow down.  
• Avoid idling. Take consideration of local  
regulations. Switch off the engine in longer  
stationary traffic.  
1
2
Option  
More information on www.oekotex.com  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
Introduction  
Volvo Car Corporation and the environment  
• Always dispose of envi-  
ronmentally hazardous  
waste, such as batteries  
and oils, in an environ-  
mentally responsible  
manner. If uncertain, con-  
sult an authorised Volvo  
workshop for advice.  
• Service your car regularly.  
• High speed increases consumption con-  
siderably due to increased wind resist-  
ance. A doubling of speed increases wind  
resistance four times.  
These hints will help you to reduce your fuel  
consumption without increasing your travel  
time or lessening the enjoyment of driving.  
Apart from being kind to your car, you’ll be  
saving money - and the Earth’s resources.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9
Seatbelts .................................................................................................. 12  
Airbag system .......................................................................................... 15  
Airbags (SRS) ........................................................................................... 16  
Activating/deactivating the  
airbag (SRS) ............................................................................................. 18  
Side airbags (SIPS bags) .........................................................................20  
Inflatable Curtain (IC) ...............................................................................22  
WHIPS ......................................................................................................23  
Roll-Over Protection System  
(ROPS) ......................................................................................................25  
When the systems deploy ........................................................................26  
Crash mode ..............................................................................................27  
Child safety ..............................................................................................28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10  
SAFETY  
01  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
01 Safety  
01  
Seatbelts  
Releasing the belt  
Always use a seatbelt  
WARNING  
– Press the red lock button and then let the  
seatbelt retract. If the seatbelt does not  
retract fully, feed the seatbelt in by hand  
so that it does not hang loose.  
Never modify or repair the seatbelt yourself.  
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop. If  
the seatbelt has been subjected to a major  
load, such as in a collision, the entire seat-  
belt must be replaced. Some of the seat-  
belt’s protective properties may have been  
lost even if the seatbelt does not appear  
damaged. The seatbelt must also be  
replaced if it shows signs of wear or dam-  
age. The new seatbelt must be type-  
approved and designed for installation at  
the same location as the replaced seatbelt.  
The seatbelt locks and cannot be withdrawn:  
• if it is pulled out too quickly.  
• during braking and acceleration.  
• if the car leans heavily.  
Keep in mind the following:  
• do not use clips or anything else that can  
prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly  
WARNING  
• ensure that the seatbelt is not twisted or  
caught on anything  
The rear seat is designed for a maximum of  
two passengers.  
Tensioning the hip strap. The belt must be  
positioned low down.  
• the hip strap must be positioned low down  
(not over the abdomen).  
Heavy braking can have serious conse-  
quences if the seatbelts are not used, so  
make sure that all passengers use their seat-  
belts. It is important that the seatbelt lies  
against the body so it can provide maximum  
protection. Do not lean the backrest too far  
back. The seatbelt is designed to protect in a  
normal seating position.  
Tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling  
the diagonal shoulder belt as illustrated.  
WARNING  
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat-  
belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this  
may diminish the protection provided by the  
airbag in the event of a collision.  
Putting on a seatbelt:  
WARNING  
– Pull the seatbelt out slowly and secure it  
by pressing the buckle into the lock. A  
loud "click" indicates that the seatbelt has  
locked.  
Each belt is intended for one person only.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12  
01 Safety  
01  
Seatbelts  
the vehicle as they drive (which means that  
they must be able to easily operate the foot  
pedals and steering wheel). They should  
strive to position the seat with as large a dis-  
tance as possible between their abdomen  
and the steering wheel.  
Seatbelts and pregnancy  
Seatbelt reminder  
The seatbelt should always be worn during  
pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in  
the correct way. The diagonal section of the  
seatbelt should wrap over the shoulder then  
be routed between the breasts and to the  
side of the abdomen. The lap section of the  
seatbelt should lay flat over the thighs and as  
low as possible under the abdomen. It must  
never be allowed to ride upward. Remove all  
slack from the seatbelt and ensure that it fits  
close to the body. In addition, check that  
there are no twists in the seatbelt.  
Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fas-  
ten their seatbelts through an audio and vis-  
ual reminder. The audio reminder is speed  
dependent, and in some cases time depend-  
ent. The visual reminder is located in the roof  
console and the combined instrument panel.  
Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt  
reminder system.  
Rear seat  
The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has  
two subfunctions:  
As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers  
should adjust their seats and steering wheel  
such that they can easily maintain control of  
• Provides information on which seatbelts  
are being used in the rear seat (shown on  
the information display). The message is  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13  
01 Safety  
01  
Seatbelts  
automatically cleared after approx.  
30 seconds or can be acknowledged  
manually by pressing the READ button.  
Seatbelt tensioner  
Seatbelt guide  
All the seatbelts are equipped with seatbelt  
tensioners. A mechanism in the seatbelt ten-  
sioner tightens the belt around the body in  
the event of a sufficiently violent collision.  
The belt then provides more effective  
restraint for occupants.  
• To provide a warning if one of the rear  
seatbelts is unfastened during a journey.  
This warning takes the form of a message  
on the information display along with the  
audio/visual signal. The warning ceases  
when the seatbelt is re-fastened or when  
manually acknowledged by pressing the  
READ button.  
The message on the information display  
showing which seatbelts are in use is always  
available. Press the READ button to see  
stored messages.  
The seatbelt guide is fitted on both the driver’s  
seat and passenger seat.  
Certain markets  
An unbelted driver will be reminded to fasten  
his or her seatbelt through an audio and vis-  
ual reminder. At low speed, the audio  
reminder will sound for the first 6 seconds.  
The seatbelt guide is an aid for providing bet-  
ter access to the seatbelt. When getting into  
and out of the rear seat remove the seatbelt  
from the seatbelt guide and position it fur-  
thest back on the seatbelt bar. Refit the seat-  
belt into the seatbelt guide afterwards.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14  
01 Safety  
01  
Airbag system  
As well as the warning sym-  
bol, a message may appear  
on the information display in  
Warning symbol on the combined  
instrument panel  
appropriate cases. Contact  
an authorised Volvo work-  
shop urgently. If the warning  
symbol malfunctions, the  
warning triangle illuminates  
and the message SRS AIR-  
BAG SERVICE REQUIRED or  
SRS AIRBAG SERVICE URGENT appears on  
the information display. Contact an author-  
ised Volvo workshop urgently.  
WARNING  
If the warning symbol for the airbag system  
remains on or illuminates while driving, it  
means that the airbag system is not func-  
tioning fully. The symbol indicates a fault in  
the seatbelt buckle, SIPS, SRS system or IC  
system. Contact an authorised Volvo work-  
shop urgently.  
1
The airbag system is continually monitored  
by the system control module. The warning  
symbol in the combined instrument panel  
illuminates when the ignition key is turned to  
position I, II or III. The symbol goes out after  
approx. 6 seconds provided the airbag  
1
system is working correctly.  
1
Includes SRS and seatbelt tensioner, SIPS,  
DMIC and ROPS.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15  
01 Safety  
01  
Airbags (SRS)  
Airbag (SRS) on the driver’s side  
Passenger airbag (SRS)  
WARNING  
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag  
deploys, passengers must sit as upright as  
possible with their feet on the floor and  
backs against the backrest. Seatbelts must  
be secured.  
WARNING  
Never place a child in a child seat or on a  
booster cushion in the front seat if the air-  
1
bag (SRS) is activated.  
Never allow a child to stand or sit in front of  
the front passenger seat. No one shorter  
than 140 cm should sit in the front passen-  
ger seat if the airbag (SRS) is activated.  
Failure to follow the advice given above can  
endanger the life of the child.  
1
The car has an airbag to supplement the  
The car has an SRS airbag (Supplemental  
Restraint System) on the driver’s side to sup-  
plement the protection afforded by the seat-  
belt. This airbag is folded up into the centre  
of the steering wheel. The steering wheel is  
marked SRS AIRBAG.  
protection afforded by the seatbelt on the  
passenger side. This airbag is folded up into  
a compartment above the glovebox on the  
passenger side. Its cover panel is marked  
SRS AIRBAG.  
1
For information on activated/deactivated air-  
bag (SRS) see page 18.  
WARNING  
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat-  
belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this  
may diminish the protection provided by the  
airbag in the event of a collision.  
1
Not all cars have a passenger airbag (SRS).  
This can be deselected when the car is  
ordered.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16  
01 Safety  
01  
Airbags (SRS)  
SRS system  
SRS system, right-hand drive  
SRS system, left-hand drive  
Location of the passenger airbag in left-hand  
drive and right-hand drive cars  
The system consists of airbags and sensors.  
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sen-  
sors and the airbag(s) are inflated with hot  
gas. To cushion the impact, the airbag  
deflates when compressed. When this  
occurs, smoke escapes into the car. This is  
completely normal. The entire process,  
including inflation and deflation of the airbag,  
takes place within tenths of a second.  
NOTE  
The sensors react differently depending on  
the course of the collision and whether the  
seatbelts on the driver and passenger side  
are used. It is therefore possible that only  
one (or none) of the airbags may inflate in a  
collision. The SRS system senses the force  
of the collision on the car and adapts  
accordingly so that only the required airbag  
is deployed.  
WARNING  
Do not put objects in front of or above the  
instrument panel where the passenger air-  
bag is located.  
The airbags have a function whereby their  
capacities are adapted to the collision force  
to which the car is subjected.  
WARNING  
Repairs must only be performed by an  
authorised Volvo workshop. Any interfer-  
ence in the airbag system could cause mal-  
function and result in serious injury.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17  
01 Safety  
01  
Activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS)  
1
A warning symbol in the roof panel indicates  
that the airbag (SRS) for the front passenger  
seat is activated (see illustration above).  
PACOS (option)  
For information on how switching takes  
place, see under the heading Activating/  
deactivating later in this chapter.  
Activating/deactivating  
The switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS)  
is located on the passenger end of the instru-  
ment panel and is accessible when the pas-  
senger door is open, (see under the heading,  
Switch – PACOS below). Check that the  
switch is in the required position. Volvo rec-  
ommends that the key blade is used to  
change position.  
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag  
(SRS) is deactivated.  
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag  
(SRS) is activated.  
For information on the key blade, see  
page 98. (Other items with a shape similar to  
a key can also be used.)  
The airbag (SRS) for the front passenger seat  
can be deactivated if the car is equipped with  
a PACOS switch. For information on how to  
activate/deactivate, see page 19.  
NOTE  
When the remote control key is inserted into  
ignition position II or III the warning symbol  
for the airbag is shown in the combined in-  
strument panel for approx. 6 seconds (see  
page 15).  
Following which, the indicator in the roof  
console is illuminated showing the correct  
status for the passenger seat airbag. For  
more information on the different ignition  
positions, see page 121.  
WARNING  
Failure to follow the advice given above can  
endanger life.  
Messages  
A text message in the roof panel indicates  
that the airbag (SRS) for the front passenger  
seat is deactivated (see illustration above).  
WARNING  
If the car is equipped with a front passenger  
airbag (SRS), but does not have PACOS,  
the airbag will always be activated.  
1
PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
18  
01 Safety  
01  
Activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS)  
Switch – PACOS  
WARNING  
WARNING  
Never place a child in a child seat or on a  
booster cushion in the front seat if the air-  
bag is activated and the symbol in the roof  
console is illuminated. Failure to follow this  
advice could endanger the life of the child.  
1
Activated airbag (passenger seat):  
Never place a child in a child seat or on a  
booster cushion on the front passenger  
seat when the airbag is activated. This  
applies to everyone shorter than 140 cm.  
Deactivated airbag (passenger seat):  
No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit in  
the front passenger seat when the airbag is  
deactivated.  
Failure to follow the advice given above can  
endanger life.  
WARNING  
2
Do not allow anyone to sit in the front pas-  
senger seat if the text message in the roof  
panel indicates that the airbag (SRS) is  
deactivated and the Airbag system warning  
symbol is displayed in the combined instru-  
ment panel. This indicates that there has  
been a severe malfunction. Visit an author-  
ised Volvo workshop urgently.  
Switch location  
1. The airbag is activated. With the switch in  
this position, persons taller than 140 cm  
can sit in the front passenger seat, but  
never children in a child seat or on a  
booster cushion.  
2. The airbag is deactivated. With the  
switch in this position, children in a  
child seat or on a booster cushion can  
sit in the front passenger seat, but  
never anybody taller than 140 cm.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
19  
01 Safety  
01  
Side airbags (SIPS bags)  
Side airbags – SIPS bags  
Child seats and side airbags  
The side airbag does not diminish the protec-  
tion provided by the car to children seated in  
a child seat or on a booster cushion.  
WARNING  
Repairs must only be performed by an  
authorised Volvo workshop.  
Any interference in the SIPS bag system  
could cause malfunction and result in seri-  
ous personal injury.  
A child seat or booster cushion can be  
placed on the front passenger seat provided  
1
that the car does not have an activated pas-  
senger airbag.  
WARNING  
Do not put objects in the area between the  
outside of the seat and the door panel,  
since this area is required by the side air-  
bag.  
Side airbag locations  
WARNING  
A large proportion of the collision force is  
transferred by the SIPS (Side Impact Protec-  
tion System) to beams, pillars, the floor, the  
roof and other structural parts of the body.  
The side airbags at the driver’s and front pas-  
senger seats protect the chest area and are  
an important part of the SIPS. The side air-  
bags are located in the front seat backrests.  
Only use car seat covers approved by  
Volvo. Other seat covers may impede the  
operation of the side airbags.  
WARNING  
Side airbags are a supplement the seat-  
belts. Always wear your seatbelt.  
1
For information on activated/deactivated air-  
bag (SRS) see page 18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
20  
01 Safety  
01  
Side airbags (SIPS bags)  
SIPS bags  
Driver’s seat, left-hand drive  
Front passenger seat, left-hand drive  
Location of airbag decal in door opening on front  
passenger side  
The SIPS bag system consists of side air-  
bags and sensors. A sufficiently violent colli-  
sion trips the sensors and the side airbags  
are inflated. The airbag inflates between the  
occupant and the door panel and thereby  
cushions the initial impact. The airbag  
deflates when compressed by the collision.  
The side airbag is normally only deployed on  
the side of the collision.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
21  
01 Safety  
01  
Inflatable Curtain (IC)  
Properties  
The inflatable curtain, DMIC (Door Mounted  
Inflatable Curtain), is a supplement to the  
SIPS system. It is fitted inside along the  
driver’s and passenger side and protects  
both front seat occupants. The inflatable cur-  
tain is activated by sensors in the event of a  
sufficiently violent collision or if the car is at  
risk of overturning. When deployed, the  
inflatable curtain inflates. The inflatable cur-  
tain helps to prevent the driver and front seat  
passenger from striking their heads on the  
inside of the car during a collision. The inflat-  
able curtain is deployed irrespective of  
whether the roof is open or closed.  
WARNING  
WARNING  
Do not load the car higher than 50 mm  
under the top edge of the side windows.  
Otherwise, the intended protection of the  
inflatable curtain, which is concealed in the  
headlining, may be compromised.  
Do not screw or fit anything to the headlin-  
ing, door pillars or side panels. This could  
compromise the intended protection. Only  
use Volvo genuine parts that are approved  
for placement in these areas.  
WARNING  
The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the  
seatbelts.  
Always use a seatbelt.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
22  
01 Safety  
01  
WHIPS  
Protection against whiplash injury – WHIPS  
The whiplash protection system (WHIPS)  
consists of energy absorbing backrests and  
specially designed head restraints for the  
front seats. The system is actuated by a rear-  
end collision, where the angle and speed of  
the collision, and the nature of the colliding  
vehicle all have an influence.  
Properties of the seat  
WHIPS system and child seats/booster  
cushions  
The WHIPS system does not diminish the  
protection provided by the car to children  
seated in a child seat or on a booster  
cushion.  
When the WHIPS system is deployed, the  
front seat backrests fall backward to alter the  
position of the driver and front seat passen-  
ger. This diminishes the risk of whiplash  
injury.  
WARNING  
Correct seating position  
WARNING  
For the best possible protection, the driver  
and front seat passenger should sit in the  
centre of the seat with as little space as pos-  
sible between the head and the head  
restraint.  
Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS  
system yourself. Contact an authorised  
Volvo workshop.  
The WHIPS system is a supplement to the  
seatbelts. Always wear your seatbelt.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
23  
01 Safety  
01  
WHIPS  
Do not obstruct the WHIPS system  
WARNING  
If a seat has been subjected to extreme  
forces, such as due to a rear-end collision,  
the WHIPS system must be checked by an  
authorised Volvo workshop.  
Part of the WHIPS system’s protective ca-  
pacity may have been lost even if the seat  
appears to be undamaged.  
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop to  
have the system checked after even a minor  
rear-end collision.  
WARNING  
Do not squeeze rigid objects between the  
rear seat cushion and the front seat back-  
rest. Make sure you do not to obstruct the  
function of the WHIPS system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
24  
01 Safety  
01  
Roll-Over Protection System (ROPS)  
ROPS function  
WARNING  
Do not carry out any work on the ROPS sys-  
tem.  
Do not place any objects on the ROPS sys-  
tem or behind the passengers’ head re-  
straints.  
Roll bars in raised position.  
The ROPS system consists of strong roll bars  
which are located behind the passengers’  
head restraints, as well as sensors. In the  
event of a situation where the car is at risk of  
overturning, or in the event of a sufficiently  
violent collision from behind, the sensors  
detect this and the roll bars rise up behind  
the passengers’ heads. The roll bars are  
deployed irrespective of whether the roof is  
open or closed.  
Always contact an authorised Volvo work-  
shop if the ROPS system has deployed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
25  
01 Safety  
01  
When the systems deploy  
System  
Triggered  
Seatbelt tensioner, front seat  
Seatbelt tensioner, rear seat  
Airbags (SRS)  
In a frontal collision and/or side-impact accident and/or rear-end collision and/or overturning.  
In a frontal collision and/or side-impact accident and/or overturning.  
1
In a frontal collision  
1
Side airbags (SIPS)  
In a side-impact accident  
1
Inflatable Curtain DMIC  
In a side-impact accident and/or overturning  
Whiplash protection WHIPS  
In a rear-end collision.  
Roll-Over Protection System (ROPS)  
In the event of overturning and/or collision from behind.  
1
The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a collision without airbag deployment. A number of factors such as the rigidity and weight of the object hit, the  
speed of the car, the angle of the collision etc. affects how the different safety systems of the car are activated.  
If the airbags have been deployed, the fol-  
lowing is recommended:  
WARNING  
WARNING  
The airbag system control module is  
located in the centre console. If the centre  
console is drenched with water or other liq-  
uid, disconnect the battery cables. Do not  
attempt to start the car since the airbags  
may deploy. Have the car transported to an  
authorised Volvo workshop.  
Never drive with deployed airbags. They  
can make steering difficult. Other safety  
systems may also be damaged. The smoke  
and dust created when the airbags are  
deployed can cause skin and eye irritation  
after intensive exposure. In case of irrita-  
tion, wash with cold water. The rapid  
deployment sequence and airbag fabric  
may cause friction and skin burns.  
• Have the car transported to an authorised  
Volvo workshop. Do not drive with  
deployed airbags.  
• Let an authorised Volvo workshop replace  
components in the car’s safety system.  
• Always contact a doctor.  
NOTE  
The SRS, SIPS, DMIC, belt tensioner and  
ROPS systems are deployed only once dur-  
ing a collision.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
26  
01 Safety  
01  
Crash mode  
If everything seems normal and you have  
checked for indications of fuel leakage, you  
may attempt to start the car.  
Driving after a collision  
WARNING  
Never, under any circumstances, attempt to  
restart the car if it smells of fuel when the  
CRASH MODE message is displayed.  
Leave the car at once.  
Firstly, remove the ignition key and then rein-  
sert it. The car’s electronics will then try to  
reset themselves to normal mode. Then try to  
start the car. If CRASH MODE is still shown  
on the display then the car must not be  
driven or towed. Even if the car appears to be  
driveable, hidden damage may make the car  
impossible to control once moving.  
WARNING  
If the car is in CRASH MODE it must not be  
towed. It must be transported to an author-  
ised Volvo workshop.  
Moving the car  
If NORMAL MODE is shown after CRASH  
MODE has been reset, the car can be moved  
carefully out of a dangerous position. Do not  
move the car further than necessary.  
If the car is involved in a collision, the text  
CRASH MODE - SEE MANUAL may appear  
on the information display. This means that  
the car has reduced functionality. Crash  
mode is a protective state that is enforced  
when the collision may have damaged the  
car’s vital functions, such as the fuel lines,  
sensors for one of the safety systems, or the  
brake system.  
WARNING  
Never attempt to repair your car or reset the  
electronics yourself if the car has been in  
crash mode. This could result in personal  
injury or the car not functioning as normal.  
Always allow an authorised Volvo workshop  
to check and restore the car to  
NORMAL MODE after CRASH MODE has  
been displayed.  
Attempting to start the car  
First, check that no fuel is leaking from the  
car. There should be no smell of fuel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
27  
01 Safety  
01  
Child safety  
applies to cars without a passenger airbag,  
or where the airbag is deactivated.  
Children should sit comfortably and  
safely  
Child seats  
The position of a child in the car and the  
choice of equipment is dictated by the child’s  
weight and size. For more information see  
page 30.  
Location of child seats  
You may place:  
• a child seat or booster cushion on the  
front passenger seat, provided the pas-  
senger airbag is not activated .  
1
NOTE  
• a rear-facing child seat in the rear seat that  
uses the back of the front seat as support.  
Regulations regarding the placement of  
children in cars vary from country to coun-  
try. Check what laws apply.  
Child seats and activated airbags are not  
compatible.  
Children of all ages and sizes must always sit  
correctly secured in the car. Never allow a  
child to sit on the knee of a passenger.  
Always place a child in the rear seat if the  
passenger airbag is activated. A child in the  
front passenger seat could suffer serious in-  
jury if the airbag deploys.  
Child seats and airbags are not compatible.  
Volvo’s own child safety equipment is  
designed for your car. Use Volvo genuine  
equipment to best ensure that the mounting  
points and attachments are correctly posi-  
tioned and are sufficiently strong.  
Volvo has child safety products that are de-  
signed for and tested by Volvo.  
WARNING  
Never place a child in a child seat or on a  
booster cushion in the front seat if the air-  
bag (SRS) is activated.  
No one shorter than 140 cm should sit in  
the front passenger seat if the airbag (SRS)  
is activated.  
NOTE  
When using child safety products it is  
important to read the installation instruc-  
tions included with the product.  
NOTE  
If problems arise when fitting child safety  
products, contact the manufacturer for  
clearer instructions.  
Do not attach the straps for the child seat to  
the horizontal adjustment bar, springs, rails  
or beams under the seat. Sharp edges can  
damage the straps. Allow the backrest of the  
child seat to rest against the dashboard. This  
Failure to follow the advice given above can  
endanger the life of the child.  
1
For information on activated/deactivated air-  
bag (SRS) see page 18.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
28  
01 Safety  
01  
Child safety  
Airbag decal  
WARNING  
Booster cushions/child seats with steel  
braces or some other design that could rest  
on the seatbelt buckle’s opening button  
must not be used, as they could cause the  
seatbelt buckle to open accidentally.  
Do not allow the upper section of the child  
seat to rest against the windscreen.  
Decal located on instrument panel end face.  
Decal located on instrument panel end face  
(Australia only).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
29  
01 Safety  
01  
Child safety  
Placement of children in the car  
With regard to other child seats your car should be included in the manufacturer’s enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the  
ECE R44 legal requirement.  
1
Weight/age  
Rear seat  
Front seat  
Volvo Child seat – rear-facing child seat, secured with the  
car’s seatbelt and straps. Use a protective cushion between  
the child seat and the dashboard.  
Group 0  
Volvo Child seat rear-facing child seat, secured with the  
car’s seatbelt, support legs and straps.  
2
max 10 kg  
(0–9 months)  
Group 0+  
max 13 kg  
Type approval: E5 03135  
Type approval: E5 03135  
Britax Baby Safe Plus – rear-facing child seat, secured with  
the ISOFIX fixture system.  
Britax Baby Safe Plus – rear-facing child seat, secured with  
the ISOFIX fixture system.  
Type approval: E1 03301146  
Type approval: E1 03301146  
Group 1  
Volvo Child seat – rear-facing child seat, secured with the  
car’s seatbelt and straps. Use a protective cushion between  
the child seat and the dashboard.  
Volvo Child seat – rear-facing child seat, secured with the  
car’s seatbelt, support legs and straps.2  
9–18 kg  
(9–36 months)  
Type approval: E5 03135  
Type approval: E5 03135  
Britax Freeway – rear-facing child seat, secured with the  
ISOFIX fixture system and straps.  
Britax Freeway – rear-facing child seat, secured with the  
ISOFIX fixture system and straps.2  
Type approval: E5 03171  
Type approval: E5 03171  
Group 2/3  
15–36 kg  
(3–12 yr)  
Volvo Booster cushion – with or without backrest.  
Volvo Booster cushion – with or without backrest.  
Type approval: E5 03139  
Type approval: E5 03139  
1
For information on activated/deactivated airbag (SRS) see page 18.  
2
To install a rear-facing child seat in the rear seat, contact an authorised Volvo dealer to have the mounting points installed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
30  
01 Safety  
01  
Child safety  
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats  
(option)  
WARNING  
Never place a child in a child seat or on a  
booster cushion in the front seat if the air-  
1
bag (SRS) is activated .  
No one shorter than 140 cm should sit in  
the front passenger seat if the airbag (SRS)  
1
is activated .  
Failure to follow the advice given above can  
endanger the life of the child.  
1
For information on activated/deactivated air-  
bag (SRS) see page 18.  
Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture sys-  
tem are concealed behind the lower section  
of the rear seat backrest, in the outer seats.  
The location of the mounting points is indi-  
cated by symbols in the backrest upholstery  
(see illustration above).  
Press the seat cushion down to access the  
mounting points.  
Always follow the manufacturer’s installation  
instructions when connecting a child seat to  
the ISOFIX mounting points.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
31  
Overview, left-hand drive car ...................................................................34  
Overview, right-hand drive car .................................................................36  
Driver’s door control panel .......................................................................38  
Combined instrument panel .....................................................................39  
Indicator and warning symbols ................................................................40  
Information display ...................................................................................44  
Electrical socket .......................................................................................45  
Lighting panel ...........................................................................................46  
Left-hand stalk switch ..............................................................................48  
Right-hand stalk switch ...........................................................................50  
Cruise control (option) ..............................................................................52  
Steering wheel keypad (option) ................................................................53  
Steering wheel adjustment, hazard warning flashers ..............................54  
Parking brake ...........................................................................................55  
Power windows ........................................................................................56  
Rearview and door mirrors .......................................................................57  
Personal preferences ...............................................................................61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
32  
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS  
02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
02 Instruments and controls  
Overview, left-hand drive car  
20  
22  
21  
19  
02  
18  
17  
16  
10 11 12 13 14 15  
8
26  
8
23 24 25  
8
9
7
9
8
7
6
27  
28  
29  
3
5
4
3
2
1
31  
30  
32  
33  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
34  
02 Instruments and controls  
Overview, left-hand drive car  
1. Steering wheel adjustment  
27.Door handle and lock button  
2. Opening handle, bonnet  
28.Glovebox  
02  
3. Control panel, windows and door mirrors  
4. Direction indicators, main beam, trip computer  
5. Lighting panel and fuel filler flap opener  
6. Door handle and lock button  
29.Gear lever (manual)/gear selector (automatic)  
30.Electrical socket and cigarette lighter  
31.Switch, roof control  
32.Parking brake  
7. Indicator lamp, locking  
33.Blind Spot Information System, BLIS  
34.Switch, optional equipment  
8. Air vents, dashboard  
9. Air vent for side window  
10.Cruise control  
11.Horn and airbags  
12.Combined instrument panel  
13.Keypad for infotainment system  
14.Windscreen wipers and washer, headlamp washers  
15.Ignition switch  
16.Rearview mirror, interior  
17.Seatbelt reminder and passenger seat airbag indicator  
18.Switch, interior lighting, left-hand side  
19.Switch, alarm detectors and deadlocks  
20.Switch, passenger compartment automatic lighting  
21.Switch, optional equipment  
22.Switch, interior lighting, right-hand side  
23.Display, car settings/audio system etc.  
24.Controls, car settings/audio system etc.  
25.Climate control  
26.Indicator lamp, hazard warning flashers  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
35  
02 Instruments and controls  
Overview, right-hand drive car  
15  
13  
14  
16  
02  
17  
18  
19  
10 11 12  
9
26  
9
20 21 22 23 24 25  
9
8
7
6
5
8
9
7
27  
28  
29  
4
32  
4
2
30  
31  
33  
3
1
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
36  
02 Instruments and controls  
Overview, right-hand drive car  
1. Electrical socket and cigarette lighter  
2. Switch, roof control  
27.Door handle and lock button  
28.Lighting panel and fuel filler flap opener  
29.Stalk switch, right  
02  
3. Parking brake  
4. Control panel, windows and door mirrors  
5. Glovebox  
30.Opening handle, bonnet  
31.Lever, steering wheel adjustment  
32.Gear lever (manual)/gear selector (automatic)  
33.Blind Spot Information System, BLIS  
34.Switch, optional equipment  
6. Door handle and lock button  
7. Indicator lamp, locking  
8. Air vent for side window  
9. Air vents, dashboard  
10.Climate control  
11.Controls, car settings/audio system etc.  
12.Display, car settings/audio system etc.  
13.Switch, interior lighting, left-hand side  
14.Switch, alarm detectors and deadlocks  
15.Switch, passenger compartment automatic lighting  
16.Switch, optional equipment  
17.Switch, passenger compartment lighting, right-hand side  
18.Seatbelt reminder and passenger seat airbag indicator  
19.Rearview mirror, interior  
20.Ignition switch  
21.Stalk switch, left  
22.Keypad, steering wheel, left  
23.Combined instrument panel  
24.Horn and airbags  
25.Keypad, steering wheel, right  
26.Indicator lamp, hazard warning flashers  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
37  
02 Instruments and controls  
Driver’s door control panel  
Driver’s door control panel  
1. Power windows, all windows down/up  
02  
2. Power windows  
3. Door mirror, left-hand side  
4. Door mirrors, setting  
5. Door mirror, right-hand side  
1
2
2
3
4
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
38  
02 Instruments and controls  
Combined instrument panel  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
02  
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
1. Speedometer.  
7. Tachometer – Indicates engine speed  
in thousands of revolutions per minute  
(rpm).  
13.Temperature gauge – Displays the tem-  
perature of the engine cooling system.  
A message will appear on the display if  
the temperature becomes too high and  
the gauge goes into the red zone. Bear  
in mind that extra lights placed in front  
of the air intake, for example, reduce  
the cooling capacity at high outside  
temperatures and high engine loads.  
2. Direction indicators, left.  
3. Warning symbol.  
8. Indicator and warning symbols.  
9. Fuel gauge.  
4. Information display – The display  
presents information and warning mes-  
sages and outside temperature. When  
the ambient temperature is between  
+2 C and –5 C, a snowflake symbol  
appears on the display. This warns of  
icy roads. The outside temperature  
gauge may show a slightly high reading  
after the car has been stationary.  
10.Button for trip meter – Used to measure  
short distances. Press the button to  
switch between trip meters T1 and T2.  
Press and hold (more than 2 seconds)  
to zero the active trip meter.  
14.Indicator and warning symbols.  
11.Display – Display for automatic gear  
position, rain sensor, odometer, trip  
meter and cruise control.  
5. Information symbol.  
6. Direction indicator, right.  
12.Main beam indicator.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
39  
02 Instruments and controls  
Indicator and warning symbols  
2. Read the information on the informa-  
tion display. Implement the action in  
accordance with the message in the  
display. Clear the message using  
READ.  
Functionality check, symbols  
Symbols in the centre of the  
instrument panel  
1
All indicator and warning symbols illuminate  
when the ignition key is turned to position II  
before starting. This is to check that the sym-  
bols are working. When the engine starts, all  
the symbols should go out except the hand-  
brake symbol, which extinguishes when the  
handbrake is released.  
02  
If the car is driven at a speed higher than  
7 km/h then the warning symbol illuminates.  
When one of the car’s systems  
does not behave as intended, the  
yellow information symbol illumi-  
nates and a text appears in the  
If the engine does not start within  
five seconds, all symbols extin-  
guish except the symbols for a  
fault in the car’s emissions system  
and for low oil pressure. Certain  
symbols may have no function,  
depending on the car’s specifica-  
tions.  
information display. The mes-  
sage text is cleared using the READ button,  
see page 44, or disappears automatically  
after a period of time (time depending on  
which function is indicated).  
The red warning symbol illumi-  
nates when a fault has been indi-  
cated which could affect the  
safety and/or driveability of the  
car. An explanatory text is shown  
The yellow information symbol can also illu-  
minate in conjunction with other symbols.  
If the car is driven at a speed lower than  
7 km/h then the information symbol illumi-  
nates.  
on the information display at the same time.  
The symbol remains visible until the fault has  
been rectified but the text message can be  
cleared with the READ button, see page 44.  
The warning symbol can also illuminate in  
conjunction with other symbols.  
NOTE  
When a service message is shown, the  
symbol and message are cleared using the  
READ button, or disappear automatically  
after a time.  
1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the car  
further.  
1
For certain engine variants, the symbol for low  
oil pressure is not used. Warnings are given  
via display text, see page 182.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
40  
02 Instruments and controls  
Indicator and warning symbols  
– Drive to an authorised Volvo workshop to  
have the ABS checked if the symbol  
remains illuminated.  
7. Low level in fuel tank  
This symbol illuminates when  
Indicator symbols – left-hand side  
02  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
there are approximately 8 litres  
of usable fuel left in a petrol-  
engined car, or approximately  
7 litres in a diesel-engined car.  
3. Rear fog lamp  
This symbol is illuminated when  
the rear fog lamp is on.  
4. Stability system STC or DSTC  
For information on the system’s  
functions and symbols, see  
page 130.  
1. Fault in car’s emissions system  
Drive to an authorised Volvo  
workshop to have the system  
checked.  
5. No function  
6. Engine preheater (diesel)  
This symbol is illuminated during  
engine preheating. Preheating  
occurs when the temperature is  
below –2 C. The car can be  
started once the symbol  
2. ABS fault  
If this symbol lights, the system is  
not working. The car’s regular  
brake system continues to work,  
but without the ABS function.  
extinguishes.  
– Stop the car in a safe place and turn off  
the engine.  
– Restart the engine.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
41  
02 Instruments and controls  
Indicator and warning symbols  
Indicator symbols – right-hand side  
5. Seatbelt reminder  
This symbol illuminates if some-  
NOTE  
02  
one in a front seat has not put on  
their seatbelt or if someone in a  
rear seat has taken off their seat-  
belt.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
The symbol illuminates irrespective of how  
hard the parking brake is applied.  
3. Airbags – SRS  
If this symbol remains on or illu-  
minates while driving, it means a  
fault has been detected in the  
seatbelt buckle, SRS, SIPS, or IC  
system. Drive directly to an  
authorised Volvo workshop to have the sys-  
tem checked.  
6. Alternator not charging  
If this symbol illuminates while  
driving, a fault has occurred in  
the electrical system. Contact an  
authorised Volvo workshop.  
7. Fault in brake system  
If this symbol lights, the brake  
fluid level may be too low.  
1
4. Low oil pressure  
If this symbol illuminates while  
driving, the engine oil pressure is  
1. Indicator symbol for trailer  
This symbol flashes when the  
too low. Stop the engine immedi-  
ately and check the engine oil  
level, top up if necessary. If the  
direction indicators are used and  
a trailer is coupled. If the symbol  
does not flash, one of the lamps  
on the trailer or the car is  
– Stop the car in a safe place and check the  
level in the brake fluid reservoir, see  
page 185. If the level in the reservoir is  
below MIN, the car should not be driven  
any further. Transport the car to an author-  
ised Volvo workshop to have the brake  
system checked.  
symbol illuminates and the oil level is normal,  
contact an authorised Volvo workshop.  
defective.  
2. Parking brake applied  
The symbol illuminates when the  
parking brake is applied. Always  
pull the parking brake lever to the  
end position.  
1
For certain engine variants, the symbol for low  
oil pressure is not used. Warnings are given  
via display text, see page 182.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
42  
02 Instruments and controls  
Indicator and warning symbols  
If the BRAKE and ABS symbols  
illuminate at the same time, there  
may be a fault in the brake force  
distribution system.  
Reminder – doors not closed  
1
If one of the doors, the bonnet or the boot  
lid is not properly closed, the driver will be  
reminded of this.  
02  
Low speed  
If the car is travelling at a speed  
lower than approx. 7 km/h, the  
information symbol will illumi-  
nate and one of the following  
texts will be shown on the dis-  
play: DRIVER DOOR OPEN, PASSENGER  
DOOR OPEN, or ENGINE HOOD OPEN.  
Stop the car safely as soon as possible and  
close the door or bonnet.  
– Stop the car in a safe place and turn off  
the engine.  
– Restart the engine.  
– If both symbols extinguish, continue driv-  
ing.  
– If the symbols remain on, check the level  
in the brake fluid reservoir. See page 185.  
High speed  
– If the brake fluid level is normal but the  
symbols are still illuminated, the car can  
be driven, with great care, to an author-  
ised Volvo workshop to have the brake  
system checked.  
If the car is moving faster than  
approx. 7 km/h, the symbol illu-  
minates and one of the texts indi-  
cated in the previous paragraph  
appears in the display.  
– If the level in the reservoir is below MIN  
then the car should not be driven any  
further. Have the car transported to an  
authorised Volvo workshop to have the  
brake system checked.  
Boot lid reminder  
If the boot lid is open, this infor-  
mation symbol will illuminate  
and BOOT LID OPEN will appear  
on the display.  
WARNING  
If the BRAKE and ABS symbols are illumi-  
nated at the same time, there is a risk that  
the rear end will skid during heavy braking.  
1
Only cars with alarms  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
43  
02 Instruments and controls  
Information display  
When a warning or indicator symbol illumi-  
nates, a message appears on the information  
display.  
Messages  
02  
1
– Press the READ button (1).  
Switch between messages with the READ  
button. Fault messages are stored in the  
memory until the fault is rectified.  
NOTE  
If a warning message appears while you are  
using the trip computer, the message must  
be read (press READ) before the previous  
activity can be resumed.  
Message  
Specification  
STOP SAFELY  
STOP ENGINE  
SERVICE URGENT  
SEE MANUAL  
Stop the car in a safe manner and turn off the engine. Serious risk of damage.  
Stop the car in a safe manner and turn off the engine. Serious risk of damage.  
Have the car checked by an authorised Volvo workshop immediately.  
Read the owner’s manual.  
SERVICE REQUIRED  
BOOK TIME FOR REGULAR SERVICE  
TIME FOR REGULAR SERVICE  
Have the car checked by an authorised Volvo workshop as soon as possible.  
Time to book regular service at an authorised Volvo workshop.  
Time for regular service at an authorised Volvo workshop. The timing is determined by the number of  
kilometres driven, number of months since the last service, engine running time and oil grade.  
MAINTENANCE OVERDUE  
CHECK OIL LEVEL  
If the service interval is not followed then the warranty does not cover any damaged parts. Contact an  
authorised Volvo workshop for service.  
Check the oil level. The message is shown every 10 000 km (certain engine variants). For information  
on checking the oil level, see page 183.  
SOOT FILTER FULL – SEE MANUAL  
DSTC SPIN CONTROL OFF  
Diesel particle filter requires regeneration, see page 120.  
The function of the stability and traction control system is reduced, see page 131 for more variants.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
44  
02 Instruments and controls  
Electricalsocket  
12 V electrical socket  
Cigarette lighter (option)  
Activate the lighter by pushing in the button.  
The button pops out when the lighter is hot.  
Pull out the lighter and light a cigarette on the  
heated coils.  
02  
The electrical socket can be used for 12 V  
accessories, such as mobile phone chargers  
and coolers. The maximum current is 10 A.  
For the socket to supply current, the ignition  
key must be in at least position I.  
WARNING  
Always leave the plug in the socket when  
the socket is not in use.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
45  
02 Instruments and controls  
Lighting panel  
the centre position. If necessary, the auto-  
matic dipped beam can be deactivated by an  
authorised Volvo workshop.  
Headlamp levelling  
The load in the car changes the vertical align-  
ment of the headlamp beam, which could  
dazzle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by  
adjusting the height of the beam.  
02  
1
2
3
Automatic dipped beam, main beam  
Turn the ignition key to position II.  
– Dipped beam is activated by means of  
turning the headlamp control (2) clockwise  
to the end position.  
Turn the ignition key to position II.  
– Turn the headlamp control (2) to one of the  
end positions.  
– Roll the control (1) up or down respec-  
tively to raise or lower beam alignment.  
– Main beam is activated by means of mov-  
ing the left-hand stalk switch towards the  
steering wheel to the end position and  
releasing it, see page 48.  
1
Cars with Bi-Xenon headlamps have auto-  
matic headlamp levelling, so there is no  
control (1).  
The lamps are switched off automatically  
when the ignition key is turned to position I  
or 0.  
4
5
6
Position/parking lamps  
Position/parking lamps can be switched on  
irrespective of ignition key position.  
Position Specification  
Instrument lighting  
Automatic/deactivated dipped  
beam. Only main beam flash.  
The instrument lighting is switched on when  
the ignition key is in position II and the head-  
lamp control (2) is in one of the end positions.  
The lighting is automatically dimmed during  
the day and can be controlled manually at  
night.  
– Turn the headlamp control (2) to the centre  
position.  
Position/parking lamps  
When the ignition key is in position II the  
position/parking lamps and number plate  
lighting are always on.  
Automatic dipped beam. Main  
beam and main beam flash  
work in this position.  
Headlamps  
– Roll the control up or down (3) for brighter  
or dimmer lighting.  
Automatic dipped beam (certain  
countries)  
Enhanced display lighting  
To facilitate reading the odometer, trip meter,  
clock and outside temperature gauge, these  
illuminate when the car is unlocked and when  
the key is removed from the ignition switch.  
Dipped beam comes on automatically when  
the ignition key is turned to position II,  
except when the headlamp control (2) is in  
1
Option  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
46  
02 Instruments and controls  
Lighting panel  
The displays extinguish when the car is  
locked.  
Brake light  
The brake light automatically comes on dur-  
ing braking.  
02  
Fog lamp  
Emergency brake light and automatic  
NOTE  
1
hazard warning flashers, EBL  
Regulations for use of fog lamps vary from  
country to country.  
Emergency Brake Lights (EBL) are activated  
in the event of heavy braking or if the ABS  
brakes are activated. This function means  
that the brake light flashes to immediately  
alert cars travelling behind.  
Front fog lamps (option)  
The front fog lamps can be switched on  
along with the headlamps or the position  
lamps/parking lamps.  
The system is activated if ABS is used for  
more than 0.5 seconds or in the event of  
heavy braking, however, only when braking  
from speeds above 50 km/h. When the  
speed of the car is lower than 30 km/h the  
brake lights shine normally again and the  
hazard warning flashers are switched on  
automatically. The hazard warning flashers  
remain on until the car accelerates again but  
can be deactivated with the button for hazard  
warning flashers, see page 54.  
– Press the button (4).  
The light in the button (4) illuminates when  
the front fog lamps are switched on.  
Rear fog lamp  
The rear fog lamp can only be switched on  
with the headlamps or the front fog lamps.  
– Press the button (6).  
The rear fog lamp indicator symbol on the  
combined instrument panel and the light in  
the button (6) illuminate when the rear fog  
lamp is switched on.  
Fuel filler flap  
Press button (5) to open the fuel filler flap  
when the car is unlocked, see page 106.  
1
Certain markets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
47  
02 Instruments and controls  
Left-hand stalk switch  
– Remove the key from the ignition switch.  
Short flash sequence  
– Move the stalk switch up or down to  
position (1) and release.  
Stalk switch positions  
– Move the stalk switch towards the steer-  
ing wheel to the end position (4) and  
release.  
02  
The direction indicators flash three times and  
the stalk switch returns to its home position.  
– Get out of the car and lock the door.  
Switching, main and dipped beam  
The ignition key must be in position II for  
main beam to be switched on.  
3
4
– Turn the headlamp control clockwise to  
the end position, see page 46.  
– Move the stalk switch towards the steer-  
ing wheel to the end position (4) and  
release.  
Main beam flash  
– Move the stalk switch gently towards the  
steering wheel to position (3).  
Main beam comes on until the stalk switch is  
released. Main beam flash only works when  
the ignition key is inserted in the ignition  
switch.  
1. Short flash sequence, direction indicators  
2. Continuous flash sequence, direction  
indicators  
3. Main beam flash  
4. Switching, main and dipped beam, and  
home safe lighting  
Direction indicators  
Home safe lighting  
Some exterior lights can be kept on and  
serve as home safe lighting after the car has  
been locked. The standard delay is  
Continuous flash sequence  
– Move the stalk switch up or down to end  
position (2).  
1
30 seconds, but can be changed to 60 or  
The stalk switch remains in its end position  
and is moved back manually, or automati-  
cally by steering wheel movement.  
90 seconds. See page 62.  
1
Factory sett.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
48  
02 Instruments and controls  
Left-hand stalk switch  
Functions  
AVERAGE  
Trip computer (option)  
The trip computer displays the following  
information:  
The average fuel consumption is stored  
when the ignition is switched off and remains  
until the function is reset. Reset using the  
RESET button (C).  
02  
C
A
AVERAGE SPEED  
ACTUAL SPEED MPH  
INSTANTANEOUS  
AVERAGE  
NOTE  
B
There may be a slight error in the reading if  
a fuel-driven heater is used.  
KILOMETRES TO EMPTY TANK  
DSTC, see page 130  
KILOMETRES TO EMPTY TANK  
The range to empty is calculated based on  
AVERAGE SPEED  
When the ignition is switched off, the average  
speed is stored and used as the basis of the  
new value when you continue driving. Reset  
using the RESET button (C).  
the average fuel consumption over the last  
30 km. When the range to empty is shorter  
than 20 km then "----" is shown on the  
display.  
Controls  
1
NOTE  
To scroll through trip computer information,  
turn the thumbwheel (B) in steps, either  
upward or downward. Continue turning to  
return to the starting point.  
ACTUAL SPEED MPH  
Current speed is displayed in mph.  
There may be a slight error in the reading if  
fuel consumption is changed due to a  
change in driving style or if a fuel-driven  
heater is used for example.  
INSTANTANEOUS  
Current fuel consumption is calculated every  
second. The information on the display is  
updated every couple of seconds. When the  
car is stationary, "----" appears on the dis-  
play. During the period for regeneration fuel  
consumption may increase, see page 120.  
NOTE  
Resetting  
– Select AVERAGE SPEED or AVERAGE  
If a warning message interrupts while you  
are using the trip computer, this message  
must be acknowledged. Acknowledge by  
pressing the READ button (A) and revert to  
the trip computer function.  
2
– Press and hold the RESET button (C) for  
at least five seconds to reset the average  
speed and average consumption at the  
same time.  
1
Certain countries  
2
Only applies to diesel cars with particle filter.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
49  
02 Instruments and controls  
Right-hand stalk switch  
Single sweep  
Windscreen wipers  
Windscreen/headlamp washer  
Raise the stalk switch to make a  
single sweep.  
Pull the stalk switch towards the steering  
wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp  
washers. The wipers will make several extra  
sweeps once the stalk is released.  
02  
B
C
D
Intermittent wiping  
High-pressure headlamp washing  
(option in certain markets)  
High-pressure headlamp washing consumes  
a large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid,  
the headlamps are washed as follows.  
Dipped beam selected with the switch on  
lighting panel:  
A
You can adjust and set a suitable  
speed for intermittent wiping.  
Turn the thumbwheel (C) up for a  
shorter interval between sweeps.  
Turn it down to increase the  
0
delay.  
The headlamps are washed the first time the  
windscreen is washed. Within the next ten  
minutes, they are washed every fifth wash of  
the windscreen. If more than ten minutes  
passes between washes, the headlamps are  
washed every time.  
Parking/position lamps selected with the  
switch on the lighting panel:  
• Bi-Xenon headlamps are only washed  
every fifth wash cycle irrespective of the  
time that elapses.  
Continuous wiping  
The wipers sweep at normal  
speed.  
A. Windscreen and headlamp washers  
B. Rain sensor – On/Off  
C. Thumbwheel  
The wipers sweep at high speed.  
IMPORTANT  
D. No function  
Before activating the wipers during winter -  
ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen  
in and that any snow or ice on the wind-  
screen is scraped away.  
Windscreen wipers off  
The windscreen wipers are off  
when the stalk switch is in  
position 0.  
• Halogen headlamps are not washed.  
The switch on the lighting panel is in  
position 0:  
IMPORTANT  
Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers  
are cleaning the windscreen. The wind-  
screen must be wet when the windscreen  
wipers are operating.  
• Bi-Xenon headlamps are only washed  
every fifth wash cycle irrespective of the  
time that elapses.  
• Halogen headlamps are not washed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
50  
02 Instruments and controls  
Right-hand stalk switch  
Rain sensor (option)  
Activating the rain sensor:  
02  
Press the button (B). A display symbol shows  
that the rain sensor is active.  
To turn the rain sensor off, either:  
– Press button (B)  
– Press the stalk switch downward to  
another wiper program. If the stalk switch  
is raised, the rain sensor will remain active,  
the wipers make an extra sweep and then  
return to rain sensor mode when the stalk  
is released to position 0.  
The rain sensor is automatically deactivated  
when the key is removed from the ignition  
switch or five minutes after the ignition is  
switched off.  
The rain sensor automatically activates the  
windscreen wipers based on how much  
water it detects on the windscreen. The sen-  
sitivity of the rain sensor can be adjusted  
using the thumbwheel (C).  
IMPORTANT  
At an automatic car wash: Deactivate the  
rain sensor by pressing the button (B) while  
the ignition key is in position I or II. Other-  
wise, the windscreen wipers could start  
swiping and become damaged.  
Turn the thumbwheel upwards for higher  
sensitivity and downwards for lower sensitiv-  
ity, (an extra sweep is made when the thum-  
bwheel is turned upwards).  
On/Off  
Thumbwheel  
When activating the rain sensor, the ignition  
key must be in position I or II and the wind-  
screen wiper stalk switch must be in  
position 0 (not activated).  
Use the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency  
of wiper sweeps when intermittent wiping is  
selected, or the sensitivity to rain when the  
rain sensor is selected.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
51  
02 Instruments and controls  
Cruise control (option)  
Activating  
Increasing or decreasing speed  
Temporary disengagement  
– Press 0 to disengage the cruise control  
temporarily. CRUISE will be shown on the  
combined instrument panel. The speed  
set earlier is stored in the memory.  
02  
The cruise control is also temporarily disen-  
gaged when:  
• the brake pedal or clutch pedal is  
depressed  
• speed falls below 25–30 km/h when trav-  
1
elling uphill  
• the gear selector is moved to position N  
• wheel spin or wheel lock-up occurs  
• a temporary increase in speed lasts longer  
than one minute.  
– Increase or decrease the speed by press-  
ing and holding + or . The speed of the  
car when the button is released is set as  
the new speed.  
The controls for cruise control are to the left  
of the steering wheel.  
Return to the set speed  
– Press this button to resume  
the previously set speed.  
CRUISE-ON appears on the  
combined instrument panel.  
Setting the desired speed:  
Pressing (less than half a second) + or –  
– Press the CRUISE button. CRUISE is  
shown on the combined instrument panel.  
1
changes the speed 1 km/h or 1.6 km/h .  
– Touch + or to lock the vehicle speed.  
CRUISE-ON appears on the combined  
instrument panel.  
NOTE  
Disengaging  
A temporary increase in speed (less than  
one minute) using the accelerator, such as  
while overtaking, does not affect the cruise  
control setting. When you release the  
accelerator, the car will return to the  
programmed speed.  
– Press CRUISE to disengage the cruise  
control. CRUISE-ON goes out on the  
combined instrument panel.  
Cruise control cannot be engaged at speeds  
below 30 km/h or above 200 km/h.  
1
Depending on engine type  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
52  
02 Instruments and controls  
Steering wheel keypad (option)  
Button functions  
02  
The four buttons at the bottom of the steering  
wheel keypad control the radio and the  
phone. The function of a button depends on  
which system is active. The steering wheel  
keypad can be used to scroll between preset  
stations, change CD tracks and adjust the  
volume.  
Press and hold one of the arrow keys to fast  
forward/reverse or search for the next sta-  
tion.  
The phone must be switched on to adjust  
audio system settings. It must be activated  
with the ENTER key to enable control of the  
phone functions with the arrow keys.  
To return to Audio only, press EXIT.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
53  
02 Instruments and controls  
Steering wheel adjustment, hazard warning flashers  
Steering wheel adjustment  
Hazard warning flashers  
02  
Use the hazard warning flashers (all direction  
indicators flash) when the car is stopped  
where it could be a traffic hazard or obstruc-  
tion. Press the button to activate the func-  
tion.  
The steering wheel can be adjusted for both  
height and reach.  
– Pull the lever towards you to release the  
steering wheel.  
– Adjust the steering wheel to the position  
that suits you best.  
A sufficiently violent collision or heavy brak-  
ing activates the hazard warning flashers  
automatically, see page 47. The function can  
be deactivated with the button.  
– Push back the lever to fix the steering  
wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press the  
steering wheel lightly at the same time as  
you push the lever back.  
NOTE  
WARNING  
Regulations regarding the use of hazard  
warning flashers vary from country to  
country.  
Adjust the steering wheel before driving off,  
never while driving. Before driving, check  
that the steering wheel is fixed in position.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
54  
02 Instruments and controls  
Parking brake  
– If the vehicle rolls, the parking brake lever  
must be pulled more firmly.  
Parking brake (handbrake)  
02  
When parking a vehicle always put the gear  
selector in 1 st gear (for manual transmission)  
or P (for automatic transmission).  
Parking on a hill  
If the car is parked facing uphill; turn the  
wheels away from the kerb.  
If the car is parked facing downhill; turn the  
wheels toward the kerb.  
How to release the parking brake  
– Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.  
– Pull the parking brake lever up slightly,  
press the button, release the parking  
brake lever and release the button.  
The lever is located between the front seats.  
NOTE  
The warning lamp symbol in the combined  
instrument panel illuminates irrespective of  
how hard the parking brake is applied.  
How to Apply the parking brake  
– Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.  
– Pull up the parking brake lever up firmly to  
its full extent.  
– Release the foot brake pedal and make  
sure that the car is at a standstill position.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
55  
02 Instruments and controls  
Power windows  
stop. Only the front windows can be closed  
automatically.  
Operation  
Driver’s door  
The power windows are operated using the  
controls in the doors. The ignition key must  
be in position I or II for the power windows to  
operate.  
02  
The control on the passenger door is oper-  
ated in the same way as on the driver’s door.  
1
2
3
All windows simultaneously  
The windows continue to work for a limited  
amount of time when the car is stopped and  
ignition key is removed, provided none of the  
doors is opened. Operate the windows with  
caution.  
All windows can be opened and closed  
simultaneously using button (1). The win-  
dows are opened automatically with a short  
press on the right-hand side of the button.  
Close by keeping the left-hand side of the  
button pressed in.  
To open a window:  
• Depress the front of the control.  
To close a window:  
WARNING  
Driver’s door control panel.  
The function that interrupts the movement  
of the windows in the event of blocking  
works with both automatic and manual  
closing, although not after the deployment  
of pinch protection.  
• Raise the front of the control.  
The windows can be opened and closed in  
two ways:  
Remote control and lock buttons  
To operate the power windows with lock but-  
tons and remote control, see page 106.  
Manual operation  
Depress one of the controls (2) or (3) gently  
or raise it gently. The power window opens or  
closes as long as the switch is actuated.  
WARNING  
WARNING  
If there are children in the car:  
Make sure that children and other passen-  
gers cannot be trapped in any way when  
closing the windows. Pay close attention if  
the rear door windows are controlled from  
the driver’s door.  
Remember to switch off the supply to the  
power windows by removing the ignition  
key if the driver leaves the car.  
Make sure that children and other passen-  
gers cannot be trapped in any way when  
closing the windows.  
Automatic operation  
Fully depress one of the controls (3) or raise  
it, then release. The side window will then  
open or close automatically. If the window is  
obstructed by an object, the movement will  
The driver can operate all of the power win-  
dows from the driver’s seat.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
56  
02 Instruments and controls  
Rearview and door mirrors  
Calibrating the compass  
Interior rearview mirror  
Rearview mirror with compass (option  
on certain markets)  
02  
1
1
2
3
The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.  
The compass is set for the geographical area  
to which the car was delivered. The compass  
should be calibrated if the car is moved  
across several magnetic zones.  
Bright light from behind could be reflected in  
the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use  
dimming when disturbed by light from  
behind.  
The upper right-hand corner of the rearview  
mirror has an integrated display that shows  
the compass direction in which the front of  
the car is pointing. Eight different directions  
are shown with English abbreviations:  
N (north), NE (north east), E (east), SE (south  
east), S (south), SW (south west), W (west)  
and NW (north west).  
Dipping  
1. Control for dimming  
– Stop the car in a wide open area with the  
engine running at idling speed.  
2. Normal position  
3. Dimmed position.  
– Press and hold button (1) for at least  
6 seconds. Following which, the sign C is  
shown (the button is concealed, so use a  
paper clip for example to press it in).  
Automatic dimming (option)  
Bright light from behind is automatically  
dimmed by the rearview mirror. The  
control (1) is not available in mirrors with  
automatic dimming.  
– Press and hold button (1) for at least  
3 seconds. The number for the current  
magnetic zone is displayed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
57  
02 Instruments and controls  
Rearview and door mirrors  
– Press the button (1) repeatedly until the  
1
6
2
number for the required magnetic zone  
(1–15) is shown, refer to the map of mag-  
netic zones for the compass.  
3
12  
11  
10  
02  
4
7
5
6
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
– Wait until the display returns to showing  
the character C.  
7
9
9
8
8
– Following which, press and hold the but-  
ton for 9 seconds and select L for left-  
hand drive cars and R for right-hand drive.  
5
4
3
2
– Drive slowly in a circle with a maximum  
speed of 10 km/h until a compass direc-  
tion is shown on the display, which indi-  
cates that the calibration is complete.  
1
Magnetic zones, Asia  
Magnetic zones, Australia  
2
3
4
5
13  
12  
11  
6
11  
12  
10  
7
8
9
8
9
8
10  
9
7
7
10  
6
13  
11  
12  
5
14  
4
13  
3
14  
Magnetic zones, Europe  
15  
Magnetic zones, South America  
Magnetic zones, Africa  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
58  
02 Instruments and controls  
Rearview and door mirrors  
– Release the buttons. The mirrors automat-  
ically stop in the fully extended position.  
Retractable power door mirrors  
(option)  
The mirrors can be retracted for parking and  
driving in narrow spaces. This can be done in  
ignition position I and II.  
Door mirrors  
02  
Resetting to neutral  
Mirrors that have been moved out of position  
by an external force must be reset to the neu-  
tral position for electric retracting and  
extending to work.  
Retracting the mirrors  
– Press the L and R button at the same  
time.  
– Press the L and R button to retract the  
mirrors.  
– Release the buttons. The mirrors automat-  
ically stop in the fully retracted position.  
– Extend the mirrors again with the L and R  
button. The mirrors are now reset to the  
neutral.  
IMPORTANT  
Do not use a scraper to remove ice from the  
mirrors as this could scratch the glass and  
Home safe and approach lighting  
The light on the door mirrors (option) illumi-  
nates when the approach lighting or home  
safe lighting is activated.  
1
the water and dirt-repellent coating could  
The controls for adjusting the two door mir-  
rors are at the front of the driver’s door arm-  
rest. The rearview mirrors can be operated in  
ignition position I and II.  
be damaged. Use the defroster function in-  
stead, see page 70.  
1
Option  
Storing door mirror positions  
– Press the L button for the left-hand door  
mirror or R for the right-hand door mirror.  
The light in the button illuminates.  
The positions of the mirrors are stored when  
the car is locked with the remote control.  
When the car is unlocked with the same  
remote control the mirrors and the driver’s  
seat adopt the stored positions.  
WARNING  
Both door mirrors are the wide angled type  
to provide optimal vision. Objects may  
appear further away than they actually are.  
– Adjust the position with the joystick in the  
centre.  
– Press the L or R button again. The light  
goes out.  
Folding out the mirrors  
– Press the L and R button at the same  
time.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
59  
02 Instruments and controls  
Rearview and door mirrors  
Water and dirt-repellent coating  
(option)  
The front side windows and/or door  
mirrors are treated with a coating  
which improves the view in poor  
weather conditions. For informa-  
tion on maintenance, see page 171.  
02  
Rearview and door mirrors  
In certain weather conditions, the function of  
the dirt-repellent coating is improved if the  
door mirror defrosters are used, see page 70.  
Heat the door mirrors:  
• If they are covered with ice or snow.  
• In heavy rain and dirty road conditions.  
• If they are misted.  
IMPORTANT  
Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove  
ice from the windows. The water and dirt-  
repellent coating could be damaged. Use  
the defroster to remove ice from the mirrors.  
An ice scraper could scratch the mirror  
glass!  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
60  
02 Instruments and controls  
Personal preferences  
Possible settings  
Clock, adjustment  
Personal preferences can be set for some of  
the car’s functions: the locks, climate control  
and audio functions. For audio functions, see  
page 206.  
The hour and minute are each adjusted sepa-  
rately.  
02  
– Use the numbers on the keypad or  
"arrow up" or "arrow down" on the navi-  
gation button (E).  
A
Control panel  
A. Display  
– Select the number for adjustment using  
"arrow right" or "arrow left" on the naviga-  
tion button.  
B. MENU  
C. EXIT  
– Press ENTER to start the clock.  
E
B
C
D. ENTER  
E. Navigation  
NOTE  
D
If the car has a 12-hour clock then  
AM/PM is selected using "arrow up" or  
"arrow down" after the final minute  
number has been adjusted.  
Use  
The settings are shown on the display (A).  
Open the menu to enter settings:  
Climate control settings  
– Press MENU (B).  
Auto blower adjust  
The fan speed can be set to AUTO mode in  
cars equipped with ECC:  
– Scroll, for example, to Car Settings with  
the navigation button (E).  
Control panel  
– Press ENTER (D).  
– Select from Low, Normal and High.  
– Select an alternative with the navigation  
button (E).  
Recirculation timer  
– Activate your selection with ENTER.  
When the timer is active, the air recirculates  
for 3 – 12 minutes, depending on the outside  
air temperature.  
Close the menu:  
– Press EXIT (C) for approximately one  
second.  
– Select On/Off depending on whether you  
wish the recirculation timer to be active.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
61  
02 Instruments and controls  
Personal preferences  
Reset all  
driver’s door. A second press then  
unlocks the passenger door and the boot  
lid.  
Information  
VIN - (Vehicle Identification Number). The  
car’s unique identity number.  
Resets the climate function options to the  
factory settings.  
02  
Number of keys - The number of keys  
registered for the car is shown.  
Car settings  
Simultaneous opening of all windows  
This function can be selected for the unlock  
button on the remote control:  
Unlock confirm. light  
The hazard warning flashers can provide  
feedback when the car is unlocked with the  
remote control. This function can be turned  
On or Off.  
Auto-open all windows – all windows are  
opened simultaneously with one long  
press on the unlock button.  
Keyless entry (option in certain markets)  
All doors – both doors and the boot lid are  
Lock confirm. light  
locked or unlocked at the same time.  
The hazard warning flashers can provide  
feedback when the car is locked with the  
remote control. This function can be turned  
On or Off.  
Both front doors – both front doors are  
unlocked simultaneously.  
One of the front doors – any door or boot  
lid can be unlocked separately.  
Automatic locking – doors  
Approach lighting  
When the speed of the car exceeds 7 km/h  
the doors and boot lid can be locked auto-  
matically. This function can be turned  
On/Off. Pulling the door handle twice  
unlocks and opens the doors from the inside.  
Select the time the car’s lights should remain  
on when the approach lighting button is  
pressed. The following alternatives are avail-  
able: 30/60/90 seconds.  
Home safe lighting  
Unlock doors  
There are two alternatives for unlocking:  
Select the time the car’s lights should remain  
on when the left-hand stalk switch is pulled  
back after the ignition key has been  
removed. The following alternatives are  
available: 30/60/90 seconds.  
All doors – one press of the remote con-  
trol unlocks both doors and the boot lid.  
Driver’s door first, then all others – one  
press of the remote control unlocks the  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
62  
02 Instruments and controls  
02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
63  
General information on climate  
control ......................................................................................................66  
Electronic climate control, ECC ...............................................................68  
Air distribution ..........................................................................................71  
Fuel-driven heater (option) .......................................................................72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
64  
CLIMATE CONTROL  
03  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
03 Climate control  
General information on climate control  
Air conditioning  
Refrigerant  
Personal preferences  
The car is equipped with electronic climate  
control (ECC). The climate control system  
controls the air conditioning (AC) and the  
cooling, heating and dehumidifying of the air  
in the passenger compartment.  
The air conditioning system contains R134a  
refrigerant. This refrigerant contains no chlo-  
rine, which means that it is harmless to the  
ozone layer. The system must only be  
charged with R134a refrigerant. Have an  
authorised Volvo workshop carry out this  
work.  
You can set preferences for two climate con-  
trol functions:  
• Fan speed in AUTO mode (applies only to  
cars with ECC).  
• Recirculation timer for passenger com-  
partment air.  
03  
NOTE  
For information about these settings, see  
page 61.  
The air conditioning can be switched off,  
but to ensure the best possible air in the  
passenger compartment and prevent the  
windows from misting, it should always  
be on.  
Passenger compartment filter  
All air which enters the passenger compart-  
ment is first cleaned by a filter. This filter  
must be replaced regularly. Follow the Volvo  
Service Programme for the recommended  
replacement intervals. If the car is used in a  
severely contaminated environment, it may  
be necessary to replace the filter more often.  
Misting windows  
Remove misting on the insides of the win-  
dows by first using the defroster function.  
To reduce the risk of misting, clean the win-  
dows with a normal window cleaning agent.  
NOTE  
There are several different types of passen-  
ger compartment filter. Ensure that the cor-  
rect filter is installed.  
Ice and snow  
Remove ice and snow from the climate con-  
trol air intake (the grille between the bonnet  
and the windscreen).  
Display  
There is a display above the climate control  
panel that displays climate control settings.  
Fault tracing and repair  
Entrust fault tracing and repair of the climate  
control system to an authorised Volvo work-  
shop only.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
66  
03 Climate control  
General information on climate control  
Acceleration  
Air vents in the dashboard  
ECC  
The air conditioning switches off temporarily  
at full throttle. You may feel a temporary rise  
in temperature.  
Actual temperature  
The temperature you select corresponds to  
the physical experience with reference to  
factors such as air speed, humidity and solar  
radiation in and around the car.  
A
Condensation  
03  
In warm weather, condensation from the air  
conditioning may drip under the car. This is  
normal.  
D
C
C
Sensor location  
• The sun sensor is on the top side of the  
dashboard.  
D
B
• The temperature sensor for the passenger  
compartment is behind the climate control  
panel.  
• The outside temperature sensor is located  
on the door mirror.  
A. Open  
• The humidity sensor is located in the  
interior rearview mirror.  
B. Closed  
C. Lateral airflow  
D. Vertical airflow  
NOTE  
Do not cover or block the sensors with  
clothing or other objects.  
Aim the outer vents towards the side win-  
dows to remove misting from the front side  
windows.  
Side windows  
Cold weather: Close the centre vents for  
optimum comfort and best demisting.  
To ensure that the air conditioning works sat-  
isfactorily, close all side windows and the  
roof.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
67  
03 Climate control  
Electronic climate control, ECC  
Control panel  
2
3
4
9
5
1
10  
03  
5
6
7
8
1. AUTO  
When one or more manual functions are  
selected the other functions are controlled  
automatically. Pressing AUTO (1) switches  
off all manual settings. The display shows  
AUTO CLIMATE.  
Functions  
1. AUTO  
2. Fan  
Automatically maintains a  
selected passenger com-  
partment temperature by  
regulating heat, fan speed,  
recirculation and air distribu-  
tion.  
3. Recirculation/Air quality system  
4. Defroster  
5. Air distribution  
2. Fan  
6. AC ON/OFF – Air conditioning On/Off  
7. Heated front left seat  
8. Heated front right seat  
Increase or decrease fan  
speed by turning the knob.  
The fan speed is regulated  
automatically if AUTO is  
selected, and the previously  
set fan speed is disengaged.  
When the roof is open more air and heat/cold  
is directed down in the passenger compart-  
ment, and the output of the climate control is  
limited if it is not possible to compensate for  
the outside temperature.  
9. Rear window and door mirror  
defrosters  
10.Temperature selector  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
68  
03 Climate control  
Electronic climate control, ECC  
Keep the following in mind:  
3. Air quality system (option)  
(same button as  
NOTE  
• As a rule, the air quality sensor should  
always be engaged.  
recirculation)  
If the knob is turned anticlockwise and the  
fan indication on the display goes out, the  
fan and the air conditioning are switched  
off. The display shows the fan symbol  
and OFF.  
The air quality system con-  
sists of a multifilter and a  
sensor. The filter separates  
gases and particles to  
• Recirculation is limited in cold weather to  
avoid misting.  
• The defroster functions for the front, side  
and rear windows can be used to demist  
the windows.  
03  
reduce the levels of odours and pollution in  
the passenger compartment. When the sen-  
sor detects polluted outside air, the air  
intakes are closed and the air in the passen-  
ger compartment is recirculated. A green  
light (A) in the button illuminates when the air  
quality sensor is active.  
3. Recirculation  
4. Defroster  
Recirculation can be used to  
shut out bad air, exhaust  
fumes, etc. from the passen-  
ger compartment. The air in  
the passenger compart-  
ment is recirculated, i.e. no  
Quickly removes misting  
and ice from the windscreen  
and side windows. Air flows  
to the windows at high fan  
speed. The light in the  
defroster button illuminates  
when the function is active.  
Activating the air quality sensor:  
outside air is taken into the car when this  
function is activated. If the air in the car recir-  
culates for too long, there is a risk of misting  
on the insides of the windows.  
– Press AUTO (1) to activate the air quality  
sensor (normal setting).  
The following also takes place when the  
defroster function is activated in order to pro-  
vide maximum dehumidification in the pas-  
senger compartment:  
Or:  
Timer  
– Switch between three functions by press-  
ing repeatedly the recirculation button.  
The timer function minimises the risk of icing,  
misting and bad air if recirculation is  
selected. See Personal preferences,  
page 61, for how to activate/deactivate the  
function.  
• the air conditioning (AC) is automatically  
switched on (can be switched off with the  
AC button (5)  
• Air quality sensor engaged – the LED (A)  
illuminates.  
• No recirculation engaged, provided it is  
not required for cooling in hot weather –  
LED not illuminated.  
• recirculation is automatically disengaged.  
When the defroster is switched off the cli-  
mate control returns to the previous settings.  
NOTE  
• Recirculation engaged – the LED (M) illu-  
minates.  
When Defroster (4) is selected, recirculation  
is always deactivated.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
69  
03 Climate control  
Electronic climate control, ECC  
rors after 12-20 minutes depending on out-  
side temperature.  
5. Air distribution  
7. and 8. Heated front seats  
(option in certain markets)  
The airflow can be distrib-  
uted to the windows, dash-  
board vents or floor by  
pressing the air distribution  
buttons.  
During cold weather the defrosting also con-  
tinues after 20 minutes in order to keep the  
rear window and door mirrors free of ice and  
To activate front seat  
heating:  
1
mist. The intensity of the defrosting can be  
03  
adapted to the outside temperature. This  
function must be switched off manually.  
A symbol on the display  
above the climate control panel and an illumi-  
nated light in the relevant button indicate  
which function has been selected.  
– Higher heat:  
Press the button once – both lights illumi-  
nate.  
10. Temperature selector  
The temperatures on the  
driver and passenger sides  
can be set independently.  
– Lower heat:  
Press the button twice – one light illumi-  
nates.  
See the table on p. 71.  
6. AC – ON/OFF  
Press the button once to  
activate one side. Press  
again to activate the other  
ON: Air conditioning is on. It  
is controlled by the system’s  
AUTO function. This way,  
incoming air is cooled and  
dehumidified.  
– Heat off:  
Press the button three times – light not  
illuminated.  
side. Press the button a third time to activate  
both sides.  
9. Rear window and door mirror  
defrosters  
Use the defroster to quickly  
remove misting and ice from  
the rear window and door  
mirrors. The rear window  
and door mirrors are  
The active side is indicated by the button’s  
light and in the display above the climate  
control panel.  
OFF: Off.  
When the defroster function is activated the  
air conditioning is automatically switched on  
(can be switched off with the AC button).  
When the car is started, the most recent set-  
ting is resumed.  
defrosted simultaneously if  
the button is pressed once. The function is  
active if one lamp is illuminated in the button.  
NOTE  
NOTE  
The climate control system’s demisting  
function with humidity sensor is significantly  
reduced with the air conditioning in deacti-  
vated mode (OFF), as well as with manually  
selected air distribution and fan speed.  
Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by  
selecting a higher or lower temperature than  
the actual desired temperature.  
The function is switched off manually or  
automatically. Switch off manually with one  
press on the button. Automatic switching off  
disconnects the rear window and door mir-  
1
Depending on market and/or options  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
70  
03 Climate control  
Air distribution  
Air distribution  
Use:  
Air distribution  
Use:  
Air to windows. Some air  
flows to the dashboard air  
vents. The air is not recircu-  
lated. Air conditioning is  
always engaged.  
To remove ice and  
misting quickly.  
Air to the floor and  
To ensure comfortable  
conditions and good  
windows. Some air flows  
to the dashboard air vents. demisting in cold or  
humid weather.  
03  
Air to windscreen and side To prevent misting and  
windows. Some air flows to icing in a cold and  
Air to floor and from  
dashboard air vents.  
In sunny weather with  
cool outside tempera-  
tures.  
the dashboard air vents.  
humid climate. (Not for  
low fan speed.)  
Airflow to windows and  
from dashboard air vents.  
To ensure good  
comfort in warm, dry  
weather.  
Air to the floor. Some air  
flows to the dashboard air  
vents and windows.  
To war m the feet.  
Airflow to the head and  
chest from the dashboard  
air vents.  
To ensure efficient  
cooling in warm  
weather.  
Airflow to windows, from  
To provide cooler air for  
dashboard air vents and to the feet or warmer air to  
the floor.  
the upper body in cold  
weather or hot, dry  
weather.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
71  
03 Climate control  
Fuel-driven heater (option)  
General information about heaters  
Activating the heater  
The parking heater can be started immedi-  
ately or set with two different start times  
using TIMER AM and TIMER PM. Here, start  
time refers to the time the car is heated and  
ready. The car’s electronic system calculates  
when heating should be started based on the  
outside temperature. The heater is not run if  
the outside temperature exceeds 25 C. At  
minus 10 C and below, the maximum run-  
ning time of the parking heater is 60 minutes.  
C
A
03  
B
Parking on a hill  
If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of  
the car should point downhill to ensure that  
there is a supply of fuel to the parking  
heater.  
Warning decal on fuel filler flap  
– Enter the time when the car is to be used.  
Press RESET (C) to enter the hours and  
minutes.  
– Press and hold the RESET (C) button until  
WARNING  
the timer is activated.  
The car must be outdoors when the petrol  
or diesel heater is used.  
Direct start  
– Use the thumbwheel (B) to scroll  
to DIRECT START.  
WARNING  
– Press RESET (C) to access the options  
ON and OFF.  
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before  
refuelling. Spilled fuel could be ignited.  
– Select ON. The heater will now run for  
60 minutes. Heating of the passenger  
compartment will begin as soon as the  
engine coolant has reached a temperature  
of 30 ºC.  
Check on the information display that the  
heater is off. When the additional heater is  
running, PARK HEAT ON is shown on the  
information display.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
72  
03 Climate control  
Fuel-driven heater (option)  
Immediate stop of heater  
Setting the TIMER AM and PM  
Clock/timer  
– Use the thumbwheel (B) to scroll  
For safety reasons, you can only programme  
times for the following 24 hours, not several  
days in advance.  
If the car clock is reset after the heater timers  
are programmed, the selected times will be  
cancelled.  
to DIRECT START.  
– Press RESET (C) to access the options  
ON and OFF.  
– Scroll with the thumbwheel to TIMER.  
Additional heater (diesel)  
(certain countries)  
– Select OFF.  
– Touch RESET to move to the flashing  
hours setting.  
03  
Extra heat from the additional heater may be  
required in cold weather to reach the correct  
temperature in the passenger compartment.  
NOTE  
– Scroll with the thumbwheel to the desired  
hour.  
The car can be started and driven while the  
parking heater is still running.  
– Touch RESET to move to the flashing  
minutes setting.  
The additional heater starts automatically  
when extra heat is required if the engine is  
running. It is switched off automatically when  
the correct temperature is reached or when  
the engine is switched off.  
Battery and fuel  
– Scroll with the thumbwheel to the desired  
minute.  
If the battery has insufficient charge or the  
fuel level is too low, the parking heater will be  
switched off automatically. A message  
appears on the information display. Acknowl-  
edge the message by pressing READ  
once (A).  
– Touch RESET to confirm the setting.  
– Press RESET to activate the timer. After  
setting TIMER AM, a second start time  
can be programmed with TIMER PM.  
Access this with the thumbwheel. Set the  
alternative start time in the same way as  
TIMER AM.  
IMPORTANT  
Repeated use of the parking heater com-  
bined with short journeys may discharge  
the battery and impair starting. If the heater  
is used regularly, the car must be driven for  
the same time as the heater is run to ensure  
that the alternator has time to charge the  
battery.  
Messages on the display  
When TIMER AM, TIMER PM and DIRECT  
START are activated, the information symbol  
on the combined instrument panel illumi-  
nates and an explanatory text appears on the  
information display. The display also indi-  
cates which TIMER is active when the driver  
removes the key from the ignition to leave  
the car.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
73  
Front seats ............................................................................................... 76  
Electrically operated roof .........................................................................79  
Wind deflector (option) .............................................................................83  
Interior lighting .........................................................................................84  
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment ......................................86  
Cargo area ................................................................................................90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
74  
INTERIOR  
04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
04 Interior  
Front seats  
The control (2) is not available for all seat  
models.  
Power seat  
Move the seat forward:  
Seating position  
– Move the handle (1) up to release the  
backrest.  
WARNING  
– Fold the backrest forward until it locks.  
Adjust the position of the driver’s seat  
before setting off, see page 13, never while  
driving.  
– Press the button (2) located by the side of  
the head restraint. Keep it pressed in.  
4
Check that the seat is locked in position.  
Entry to the rear seat – Easy entry  
5
6
04  
Make sure that the seatbelt is removed from  
the belt guide before passengers enter or exit  
the car, see page 14. The easy entry position  
is intended for use when the seat is empty.  
1
2
3
Mechanical seat  
Move the seat forward:  
The driver’s and passenger seats can be  
adjusted to the optimum sitting and driving  
positions  
2
1
– Move the handle (1) up to release the  
backrest.  
1. Forward/backward: lift the handle to  
adjust the distance to the steering wheel  
and pedals. Check that the seat is locked  
after changing position.  
– Fold the backrest forward until it locks.  
– Release the handle and slide the seat  
forwards.  
Easy entry  
2. Raise/lower front edge of seat cushion,  
pump up/down.  
Move the seat backward:  
Move the seat backward:  
– Move the seat backward to the original  
position.  
3. Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down.  
– Press the button (2) located to the side of  
the head restraint. Keep it pressed in.  
1
4. Lumbar support , turn the wheel.  
– Move the handle (1) up to fold the back-  
rest back.  
5. Adjust backrest rake, turn the wheel.  
6. Control panel for power seat (option).  
– Move the handle (1) up and fold back the  
backrest.  
The seat returns to the same position it had  
before folding forward for Easy entry.  
1
Also applies to power seat.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
76  
04 Interior  
Front seats  
Memory function  
Power seat (option)  
NOTE  
The seat can only be moved to the very  
front (+6 cm) to facilitate entry and exit to  
and from the rear seat when the backrest  
has been folded forward.  
If the backrest is folded back when the seat  
is in the front position then the seat auto-  
matically moves back approx. 6 cm after a  
few seconds.  
04  
WARNING  
Check that the backrest is properly folded  
back by pushing and pulling the head  
restraint.  
1
2
3
4
Buttons for memory function  
The seats can be adjusted for a certain time  
after unlocking the door with the remote con-  
trol without the key being inserted into the  
ignition switch. The seat can always be set in  
ignition position I or II.  
The belt on the front passenger side must be  
in the belt guide during driving, even when  
there is no passenger sitting in the seat.  
Store setting  
– Adjust the seat and the door mirrors.  
– Press and hold button M while pressing  
button 1, 2 or 3 simultaneously.  
Floor mats (option)  
Volvo supplies floor carpets which are espe-  
cially produced for your car.  
1. Front edge of seat cushion up/down  
2. Seat, forwards/backwards  
3. Seat, up/down  
Using a stored setting  
Press one of the memory buttons 1 3 until  
the seat and the door mirrors stop. If you  
release the button then the movement of the  
seat will stop.  
WARNING  
4. Backrest rake  
The floor mat at the driver’s seat must be  
firmly fitted and secured in the attachment  
clips to prevent it from being trapped  
around and under the pedals.  
Overload protection is deployed if any seat is  
blocked. If this occurs, switch off the ignition  
and wait a short time before operating the  
seat again. Only one of the seat’s settings  
can be adjusted at a time.  
Key memory in remote control key  
The positions of the driver’s seat and the  
door mirrors are stored in the key memory  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
77  
04 Interior  
Front seats  
when the car has been locked with the  
remote control key. When the car is unlocked  
with the same remote control key the driver’s  
seat and the door mirrors adopt the stored  
positions when the driver’s door is opened.  
NOTE  
The key memory is independent of the seat  
memory.  
04  
Emergency stop  
If the seat accidentally begins to move, press  
any of the buttons to stop the function.  
WARNING  
Risk of crushing. Make sure that children do  
not play with the controls.  
Check that there are no objects in front of,  
behind or under the seat during adjustment.  
Ensure that none of the rear seat passen-  
gers is in danger of becoming trapped.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78  
04 Interior  
Electrically operated roof  
Conditions for roof operation  
WARNING  
– No objects on the parcel shelf.  
People, children or objects can be trapped  
by the roof or boot lid’s moving parts.  
• Operate the roof with caution.  
• See decal on the cargo separator.  
• Do not allow children to play with the  
controls.  
– No ice, snow or loose objects on the roof  
or boot lid.  
– Dry roof.  
– 2.0 m clearance upward (A) and 0.2 m  
between bumper and objects behind (B).  
A
– Ambient temperature –10 C or warmer.  
– Closed cargo separator, see page 90.  
– Closed boot lid.  
• Do not leave the roof in a stationary posi-  
tion for longer than necessary.  
04  
– Stationary car, brake pedal depressed.  
WARNING  
B
If the instructions on the following pages are  
not followed then this could cause damage  
to the roof’s opening and closing mecha-  
nisms.  
Never leave the car key in the car if there are  
children in the car.  
IMPORTANT  
Volvo also recommends that the following is  
observed:  
Water collecting on the roof can run down  
into the cargo area and the passenger com-  
partment if the roof is opened.  
– Level ground.  
– Execution of roof operation in one single  
movement.  
– Engine at idling speed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
79  
04 Interior  
Electrically operated roof  
Hatch cover  
Opening and closing the roof  
WARNING  
Never pull the release wire for the hydraulic  
system that is located under the rear seat  
cushion. Only service personnel are allowed  
to use the hydraulic system’s emergency  
release function.  
1
2
Consequences:  
• significant risk of crushing injury  
• uncontrolled movement/opening of the  
electrically operated roof or boot lid  
• the roof components could be destroyed.  
04  
Make thoroughly sure that the conditions  
are fulfilled before operating the roof.  
Text on the information display  
A number of these messages also apply to  
loading assistance, see page 91.  
When the roof is open there is a hatch cover  
between the head restraints in the rear seat  
and the boot lid, see illustration.  
– Turn the ignition key to position II, prefera-  
bly starting the engine.  
– Depress the brake pedal.  
PRESS BRAKE FOR ROOF OPERATION  
Depress the brake pedal in order to operate  
the roof.  
– Keep the left-hand button (1) pressed in to  
close, or the right-hand button (2) to open.  
IMPORTANT  
Pay attention to any messages on the infor-  
mation display while the roof is in motion.  
The windows that are closed are opened  
approx. 10 centimetres. All windows are  
closed when the movement of the roof is  
completed.  
Do not sit on the hatch cover or use it as a  
support as it could be damaged.  
OPEN BOOT LID FULLY  
– Open boot lid fully.  
CLOSE BOOT FOR ROOF OPERATION  
– The boot lid is not closed. Close the boot  
lid.  
CLOSE BOOT SEP. FOR ROOF OPERAT.  
The cargo separator is not closed. Close  
the cargo separator, see page 90.  
Release the button when a signal sounds and  
the message ROOF CLOSED or  
ROOF OPEN is shown on the information  
display.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
80  
04 Interior  
Electrically operated roof  
LOW BATTERY FOR ROOF OPERATION –  
The battery voltage is too low. The roof  
can only be closed. Charge the battery,  
e.g. by starting the engine, and try again.  
Special instructions for manoeuvring in  
the event of a roof fault  
If the message ROOF FAILURE  
SEE MANUAL is shown on the information  
display then the roof cannot be operated nor-  
mally.  
WARNING  
Never pull the release wire for the hydraulic  
system that is located under the rear seat  
cushion. Only service personnel are allowed  
to use the hydraulic system’s emergency  
release function.  
ROOF NOT LOCKED – The roof has not  
been opened or closed properly. Try again  
to open or close the roof.  
Consequences:  
• significant risk of crushing injury  
• uncontrolled movement/opening of the  
electrically operated roof or boot lid  
ROOF IN LOAD AID POSITION – The roof  
has been raised with the loading assist-  
ance function. Lower the roof, see  
page 90.  
NOTE  
After the roof has been closed it cannot be  
opened again.  
04  
TEMP LIMITS ROOF OPERATION – The  
roof system is either overheated or the  
outside temperature is below –10 C. If the  
roof is overheated, wait approx. five min-  
utes until the message goes and try again.  
• the roof components could be destroyed.  
Repairs must only be performed by an au-  
thorised Volvo workshop. Any interference  
in the roof system could cause malfunction  
and serious injury as a result.  
IMPORTANT  
Closing in the event of a roof fault requires  
very careful checking of the conditions for  
operating the roof, see page 79. Even if the  
conditions are fulfilled, there is a significant  
risk of material damage.  
Messages with roof faults  
Two messages can be shown on the infor-  
mation display in the event of a roof fault:  
– Keep the closing button pressed in until  
ROOF FAILURE SEE MANUAL is shown  
on the display. Following which, release  
the button.  
ROOF FAILURE SERVICE REQUIRED –  
The roof cannot be operated. This requires  
service by an authorised Volvo workshop.  
Covering over can be performed in  
– Press the closing button again. Keep it  
pressed in for at least 30 seconds until the  
roof and boot lid are closed. Pay attention  
for any faults that could cause damage to  
the car.  
accordance with the instructions.  
ROOF FAILURE SEE MANUAL – The roof  
or loading assistance must be operated in  
accordance with special instructions.  
Service must be performed by an author-  
ised Volvo workshop.  
A signal sounds during the whole closing  
operation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
81  
04 Interior  
Electrically operated roof  
– Secure the hooks (4) in the rear wheel  
arches and the hooks (6) under the rear  
bumper.  
Plastic cover for temporary covering  
1
04  
6
5
4
3
2
Plastic cover, located in the ski hatch.  
If the roof cannot be closed due to low bat-  
tery voltage or a possible roof fault then a  
protective plastic cover can be fitted. The  
plastic cover is fitted with the rope attach-  
ments inward.  
– Raise the windows (if possible).  
– Take the plastic cover from the centre  
panel in the rear seat backrest at the ski  
hatch.  
– Take the plastic cover from the package  
and unwrap it.  
The plastic cover is stored in a bag marked  
"Cover for temporary use".  
– Thread the hole (3) over the door mirror  
and secure the hooks (2) in the front wheel  
arches.  
– Clamp the plastic cover between the wiper  
blades and the windscreen and stretch the  
plastic so that it has one tuck (1) per wiper  
blade.  
– Guide through the antenna (5).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
82  
04 Interior  
Wind deflector (option)  
Wind deflector  
NOTE  
Be careful of the car’s upholstery.  
– Press the locking levers into the holders  
on the side panels until a click is heard.  
– Open out the wind deflector.  
The zips in the wind deflector are used for  
storing/retrieving luggage on the rear seat.  
04  
WARNING  
Check that the wind deflector is secured  
firmly. Otherwise it may detach in the event  
of sudden movement for example and then  
cause injury and damage.  
Wind deflector  
The wind deflector can be used when driving  
with a lowered roof to reduce the swirling air-  
flow and draughts in the passenger compart-  
ment.  
WARNING  
No passengers are allowed in the rear seat  
when the wind deflector is fitted.  
Installing the wind deflector  
– Fold out the four-part deflector to is full  
size and press the catch together.  
The deflector is stored in the cargo area in its  
bag, under the cargo separator, furthest for-  
ward against the backrest.  
– Insert the wind deflector’s supports under  
the head restraints so that they are resting  
against the top edge of the backrest.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
83  
04 Interior  
Interior lighting  
Front seat lighting  
The reading lamps can be switched on in  
ignition position I and II as well as when the  
engine is running. They can also be activated  
within 30 minutes after the engine has been  
switched off or when one of the doors has  
been opened/closed.  
Automatic lighting  
The passenger compartment lighting is  
switched on and off automatically when  
button (2) is in neutral position.  
1
2
3
The passenger compartment lighting is  
switched on and remains on for 30 seconds  
if:  
Rear seat lighting  
• the car is unlocked from the outside with  
the key or remote control  
04  
• the engine is stopped and the ignition key  
is turned to position 0  
The passenger compartment lighting is  
switched off when:  
• the engine is started  
1. Reading lamp left-hand, On/Off  
• the car is locked from the outside with the  
key or remote control  
2. Passenger compartment lighting front  
and rear  
The passenger compartment lighting comes  
on and remains on for 5 minutes if one of the  
doors is open.  
3. Reading lamp right-hand, On/Off  
Switch (2) has three positions for the interior  
lighting:  
The passenger compartment lighting can be  
switched on or off within 30 minutes from the  
time that the key is turned to position 0,  
using button (2). The lighting remains on for  
5 minutes if it is not switched off.  
Switched on or off with one press of the  
button.  
• Off (0) – right-hand side depressed, auto-  
matic lighting off.  
• Neutral position – interior lighting comes  
on when a door is opened and goes out  
when the door is closed. The dimmer  
function is active.  
• On – left-hand side depressed, passenger  
compartment lighting on.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
84  
04 Interior  
Interior lighting  
1
Vanity mirror  
04  
The light illuminates automatically when the  
cover is lifted.  
1
Option on certain markets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
85  
04 Interior  
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment  
1
2
3
4
5
04  
10  
9
8
7
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
86  
04 Interior  
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment  
Coat hanger  
Storage spaces  
Glovebox  
1. Storage compartment in door panel with  
holder for ice scraper (lockable as  
option).  
1
2
2. Coat hanger, only for light garments.  
3
3. Storage pocket on front edge of front  
seat cushions.  
4. Ticket clip  
5. Glovebox  
6. Cup holder (with roller cover, option  
certain markets)  
04  
7. Tunnel compartment (e.g. for CD discs)  
8. Cup holder (with roller cover, option)  
9. Storage compartment in rear side  
panel.  
The coat hanger is located on the passenger  
seat head restraint. Only hang light garments  
on the hanger.  
The owner’s manual and maps can be kept  
here. There are also holders for coins, pens  
and fuel cards. The glovebox can be locked  
with the remote control’s detachable key  
blade. Further information is available on  
page 98.  
10.Storage pocket on the rear edge of the  
front seats.  
WARNING  
Ensure that no hard, sharp or heavy objects  
lie or protrude in such a way that they could  
cause injury during heavy braking.  
Always secure large and heavy objects with  
a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.  
Locking the glovebox:  
1. Insert the key blade into the keyhole.  
2. Turn the key a quarter of a turn  
(90 degrees) clockwise.  
3. Remove the key. The keyhole is hori-  
zontal in the locked position.  
To unlock the glovebox, carry out the above  
in reverse order.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
87  
04 Interior  
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment  
Storage compartment in rear side  
panel  
Storage under the front armrest  
Cup holder in centre console  
04  
The storage compartment is opened and  
closed with a touch in the centre of its upper  
section.  
There is space for a double cup holder under  
the roller cover. The space can be used for  
storage by lifting out the cup holder. Lift at  
the rear edge of the cup holder where there is  
a recess.  
There is a storage space under the armrest.  
There is also a smaller storage space in the  
detachable armrest. Press the small button  
and lift the armrest to open the shallow com-  
partment. Press the large button and lift the  
armrest to open the deeper compartment.  
If the cup holder is being fitted - first align its  
two guide lugs in the two recesses in the  
front edge of the space and then press down  
the rear edge of the cup holder.  
Close the roller cover by gripping its front  
edge from below and pulling forward.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
88  
04 Interior  
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment  
Storage compartment behind the  
handbrake  
04  
When there are no buttons for parking assist-  
ance and BLIS, see page 133 and page 136,  
the space can be used as a storage  
compartment.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
89  
04 Interior  
Cargo area  
Cargo separator  
Loading assistance  
04  
Decal on cargo separator  
Button for raising and lowering the roof.  
The purpose of the separator is to limit the  
amount of the load in the cargo area so that  
the movement of the roof is not disrupted. Be  
sure to close the cargo separator fully so that  
it is locked on both the left and right-hand  
sides.  
In open position the roof is folded up in the  
cargo area. The roof can be raised or lowered  
to facilitate loading and unloading using the  
button (see illustration). The movements for  
loading assistance constitute a small amount  
of the normal movement of the roof. Conse-  
quently the messages for roof operation on  
the information display also apply to loading  
assistance, see page 80.  
NOTE  
Too much load in the cargo area prevents  
the cargo separator from being closed.  
Consequently the roof is also prevented  
from opening.  
IMPORTANT  
Do not place objects above or alongside the  
cargo separator when it is closed. Do not  
position luggage so that it is higher that the  
closed cargo separator.  
WARNING  
People or objects which prevent the raising  
and lowering of the roof are at risk of being  
trapped.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
90  
04 Interior  
Cargo area  
Using loading assistance  
Using loading assistance with roof  
faults  
If the message ROOF FAILURE SEE  
MANUAL is shown on the information dis-  
play then the roof can only be lowered.  
One press on the button both starts and  
stops raising/lowering. It may take several  
seconds before the movement starts. If a sig-  
nal sounds when the button is pressed and  
the roof does not move, read the message on  
the information display.  
– Check that ROOF FAILURE SEE  
MANUAL is shown on the display.  
– Press the button to raise the roof.  
– Keep the button depressed for approx.  
5 seconds. Keep the button depressed  
while the roof is lowered.  
– Lift the cargo separator and move it into  
the cargo area.  
04  
A signal sounds during the whole lowering  
operation.  
– When loading is complete, fold down the  
cargo separator.  
– Press the button so that the roof is  
lowered.  
IMPORTANT  
When the roof is raised for loading assist-  
ance or if the movement is interrupted by  
pressing in the button twice then the boot  
lid must not be closed. This could result in  
damage and malfunction in the system.  
NOTE  
If the battery level is too low then the roof  
can only be lowered.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
91  
04 Interior  
Cargo area  
Load retaining eyelets  
Electrical socket in cargo area  
Ski hatch  
04  
1
Fold down the cover to access the electrical  
socket which socket works regardless of  
whether or not the ignition is on.  
There is a hatch behind the centre panel in  
the rear seat backrest for transporting long,  
light objects.  
There are four or more eyelets for securing  
straps or ropes. Straps that are suitable for  
the eyelets are supplied by Volvo dealers.  
Remember to avoid using the electrical  
socket with the ignition switched off due to  
the risk of discharging the battery.  
Max. length: 2 m and max. weight: 25 kg.  
The ski hatch is opened from two directions,  
from the centre panel and from inside the  
cargo area.  
1
Emergency puncture repair kit, first aid, plas-  
tic cover and towing eye are stored in the cen-  
tre panel in the rear seat backrest. For cars  
with spare wheel (option), see page 161.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
92  
04 Interior  
Cargo area  
1
If the car is equipped with a ski bag then the  
Open the centre section in the back of  
belt must be threaded through its handle.  
the rear seat  
– Pull the strap in the top of the backrest  
centre section to access the hatch.  
WARNING  
Stop the engine and apply the parking  
brake when loading or unloading long  
objects.  
A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a  
frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, carry  
the impact of an item weighing 1000 kg.  
Always secure the load. During heavy  
braking the load may otherwise shift, caus-  
ing personal injury.  
Close the centre section in the back of  
the rear seat  
– Refit the centre section with the lower part  
first.  
– Fold in the centre section and press until a  
clicking sound is heard.  
04  
Hatch in cargo area  
If the car is equipped with ski bag then the  
1
zip in the bag must also be opened from the  
passenger compartment.  
– Press the buttons in the two holes in the  
hatch towards each other and open the  
hatch.  
Locking the ski hatch  
Locked with the remote control, see page 99.  
Secure long loads with the seatbelt  
Long loads, for example skis, must be  
secured with the rear seat’s seatbelt.  
– Wrap the seatbelt one turn around the skis  
and lock it in the normal way in the  
seatbelt buckle.  
1
Option  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
93  
Remote control with key blade ................................................................96  
Active locks ..............................................................................................99  
Privacy locking (option) ..........................................................................100  
Keyless drive (option) ............................................................................. 102  
Battery in remote control ....................................................................... 105  
Locking and unlocking ........................................................................... 106  
Alarm (option) ......................................................................................... 110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
94  
LOCKS AND ALARM  
05  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
05 Locks and alarm  
Remote control with key blade  
Remote control  
Turn signal indication during locking/  
unlocking  
When the car is unlocked using the  
Keyless Drive system or the remote control,  
two short flashes of the direction indicators  
serve to indicate that unlocking was correctly  
performed.  
Loss of a remote control  
If you lose a remote control, take the car and  
the other remote controls to an authorised  
Volvo workshop. The code of the missing  
remote control must be erased from the sys-  
tem as a theft prevention measure.  
The car is supplied with two remote controls.  
They also serve as ignition keys. The remote  
controls contain detachable metal key blades  
for mechanical locking/unlocking of the  
driver’s door, boot lid and glovebox.  
Immobiliser  
The key blades’ unique code is available at  
authorised Volvo workshops, who can order  
new key blades.  
For locking, the indication takes place with  
one long flash and only if all locks have been  
locked, after the doors and the boot lid have  
been closed.  
The remote controls are fitted with coded  
chips. The code must be accepted by the  
reader (receiver) in the ignition switch. The  
car can only be started if the correct remote  
control with the correct code is used.  
A maximum of six remote controls/key  
blades can be programmed and used for one  
single car.  
Personal preferences can be used to deacti-  
vate indication via the direction indicators.  
There will then be no visual indication as to  
whether the lock status is correct. See  
page 62.  
05  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
96  
05 Locks and alarm  
Remote control with key blade  
control to switch on the interior lighting,  
position/parking lamps, number plate  
lighting and door mirror lamps (option).  
The lighting is switched off automati-  
cally after 30, 60 or 90 seconds. For  
time setting, see page 62.  
Remote control functions  
2
4
4. Boot lid — Press the button once to  
unlock the boot lid only.  
1
3
NOTE  
5
The function does not open the boot lid.  
5. Panic function — Used to attract atten-  
tion in an emergency.  
Press and hold the red button for at  
least three seconds or press it twice  
within three seconds to activate the  
direction indicators and the horn.  
The function can be turned off with the  
same button once it has been active for  
at least 5 seconds.  
05  
1. Locking – locks the doors, the boot lid,  
the storage compartments in the door  
panels (lockable as option) as well as the  
ski hatch. The remote control does not  
lock the glovebox.  
Otherwise the function switches off  
automatically after 30 seconds.  
2. Unlocking – unlocks the doors, the boot  
lid, the storage compartments in the door  
panels (lockable as option) as well as the  
ski hatch. The remote control does not  
unlock the glovebox. Press and hold to  
open the side windows.  
IMPORTANT  
The narrow section of the remote control is  
particularly sensitive - this contains the  
chip. The car cannot be started if the chip is  
damaged.  
3. Approach lighting – used to switch on  
the car’s lighting at a distance, e.g. if a  
driver is approaching a locked car and  
wants it illuminated.  
Press the yellow button on the remote  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
97  
05 Locks and alarm  
Remote control with key blade  
Detachable key blade  
Removing the key blade  
To take the key blade out of the remote con-  
trol:  
Unlocking doors with the key blade  
If central locking cannot be activated with the  
remote control, e.g. if the batteries are dis-  
charged, then the driver’s door can be  
unlocked and opened as follows:  
– Slide the spring-loaded catch (1) to the  
side while pulling the key blade (2) out.  
– Insert the key blade in the driver’s door  
keyhole.  
Inserting the key blade  
Be careful when inserting the key blade into  
the remote control.  
– Turn the blade 45 degrees clockwise and  
open the door.  
– Hold the remote control with the narrow  
end pointing down and lower the key  
blade into its slot.  
1
NOTE  
2
When the driver’s door is unlocked using  
the key blade and is opened, the alarm is  
triggered. It is deactivated by inserting the  
remote control in the ignition switch. See  
page 111.  
– Lightly press the key blade to lock it in  
position. You should hear a "click".  
05  
Using the remote control’s detachable key  
blade:  
• the driver’s door can be opened manually  
if central locking is not activated with the  
remote control, see the section and  
page 103.  
• the boot lid can be opened manually if  
central locking is not activated with the  
remote control, see page 107.  
• access to the glovebox and cargo area  
(privacy locking) is blocked, see page 100.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
98  
05 Locks and alarm  
Active locks  
1
2
A
A
D
D
F
G
F
G
B
B
A
A
05  
1. Active locks for remote control:  
2. Active locks for remote control with  
lockable storage compartments:  
A. Doors  
A. Doors  
B. Steering lock  
F. Ski hatch  
G. Boot lid  
B. Steering lock  
D. Storage compartments in door panels  
F. Ski hatch  
G. Boot lid  
For descriptions of the different storage  
areas, see page 87.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
99  
05 Locks and alarm  
Privacy locking (option)  
1
2
A
A
A
D
D
C
B
E
F
B
A
05  
1. Central locking’s normal active locks with the remote control. 2. Active locks for remote control with key blade removed and with activated privacy locking.  
1
The privacy locking function means that the  
remote control’s normal control of central  
locking is limited; the car’s lockable storage  
compartments are blocked and cannot be  
unlocked with the remote control. This can  
be desirable when the car is left for service,  
at a hotel or similar.  
Activating privacy locking  
NOTE  
NOTE  
When opening/closing the folding roof there  
is the option to temporarily access the con-  
tents in the cargo area.  
The information display will show CLOSE  
BOOT SEP. FOR ROOF OPERAT.  
– Close the boot lid.  
– The folding roof must be closed.  
– Remove the detachable key blade from  
the remote control, see page 98.  
With the privacy locking function activated  
the remote control can only be used to arm/  
disarm the alarm, lock and unlock the  
doors (A) as well as to start and drive the  
car (B).  
– Open the boot lid and fold up the cargo  
separator; at which operation of the fold-  
ing roof is blocked, see page 90.  
1
Certain markets.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
100  
05 Locks and alarm  
Privacy locking (option)  
Locking the glovebox only  
Deactivating privacy locking  
In order to reconnect the lockable storage  
compartments to the central locking’s auto-  
matic system, proceed as follows:  
1
1
2
3
2
– Insert the remote control’s detachable key  
blade into the glovebox keyhole (C) and  
turn 180 degrees anticlockwise.  
3
– Replace the key blade in the remote con-  
trol, see page 98.  
Following which, the glovebox is unlocked  
and all central locking functions are control-  
led by the remote control again.  
– Insert the key blade into the glovebox  
keyhole (C) and turn 180 degrees clock-  
wise.  
The keyhole is vertical in the locked posi-  
tion for privacy locking.  
05  
The glovebox can only be locked/unlocked  
using the remote control’s detachable key  
blade. For information on removing the key  
blade, see page 98.  
NOTE  
– Lock the glovebox by turning the key  
blade a quarter of a turn (90 degrees)  
clockwise.  
The keyhole is horizontal in the locked  
position.  
Do not reinsert the key blade into the  
remote control but keep it in a safe place  
instead.  
– Unlock by carrying this out in reverse  
Following which, the glovebox is locked and  
the lockable storage compartments behind  
the door panels (D), the ski hatch (E) and the  
boot lid (F) can no longer be unlocked with  
the remote control.  
order.  
The keyhole is vertical in the unlocked  
position.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
101  
05 Locks and alarm  
Keyless drive (option)  
Remote control max. 1.5 m from the car  
In order to open a door or the boot lid, a  
remote control must be no more than  
approx. 1.5 m from the car door handle or  
boot lid.  
Never leave any remote control in the  
car  
If a remote control with keyless drive function  
is left in the car, it is made passive when the  
car is locked. This prevents unauthorised  
entry.  
Keyless lock and ignition system  
This means that the person who wishes to  
open a door must have the remote control  
with him or her. It is not possible to open a  
door if the remote control is on the other side  
of the car.  
If someone breaks into the car and finds the  
remote control, it can be activated and used  
again. It is therefore important to handle all  
remote controls with care.  
The grey area in the illustration indicates the  
range covered by the system’s antennas.  
Interference to remote control function  
Electromagnetic screening and fields can  
interfere with the keyless drive system. To  
avoid this: do not place the remote control  
near mobile phones, metallic objects or, for  
example, in a metal briefcase.  
If someone leaves the car and takes a key-  
less drive remote control with them, a warn-  
ing message appears on the information dis-  
play and a reminder signal sounds. The  
warning message disappears when the  
remote control is brought back to the car or  
when the ignition dial is turned to position 0.  
The warning is only issued if the ignition dial  
is in position I or II after someone has  
opened and closed a door.  
05  
Keyless function range.  
The keyless drive system allows the car to be  
unlocked, driven and locked without the  
need for a key. You simply need to have the  
remote control with you in a pocket or a bag.  
If interference is experienced nonetheless,  
use the remote control and key blade in the  
normal way. See page 96.  
The system makes it easier and more con-  
venient to open the car, for example with  
shopping bags in one hand and a child in the  
other. It saves you having to take out or look  
for the remote control.  
The warning message and reminder signal  
disappear when the remote control is  
brought back to the car after one of the fol-  
lowing actions:  
The two remote controls incorporate the key-  
less drive function. You can order additional  
remote controls. The keyless drive system  
can handle up to six remote controls.  
• a door has been opened and closed  
• the ignition dial has been turned to  
position 0  
• the READ button has been pressed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
102  
05 Locks and alarm  
Keyless drive (option)  
Locking  
Unlocking doors with the key blade  
NOTE  
On cars with the keyless drive system and  
automatic transmission the gear selector  
must be moved to the P position and the  
ignition dial turned to the 0 position. Other-  
wise the car cannot be locked or alarmed.  
Unlocking  
When the remote control is within the range  
covered by the system’s antennas:  
Cars with the keyless system have a button on  
the outside door handles.  
– Open the doors by pulling the relevant  
handle.  
05  
When the remote control is within the range  
covered by the system’s antennas, the doors  
and the boot lid are locked as follows:  
– Open the boot lid by pressing under the  
boot lid opening button and then lift the  
boot lid.  
If central locking cannot be activated with the  
remote control, e.g. if the batteries are dis-  
charged, then the driver’s door can be  
opened as follows:  
If for some reason the keyless drive function  
in the remote control is not operating, the car  
can be unlocked using the remote control  
functions, see page 97.  
– Push in the lock button on one of the door  
handles.  
– To access the keyhole:  
Both doors must be closed before the lock  
button is depressed. Otherwise they are not  
locked.  
Carefully prise off the plastic cover on the  
handle by inserting the key blade into the  
hole on the underside of the plastic cover.  
Power seat (option) – remote control  
with memory function  
If several people with keyless drive remote  
controls get into the car, then the driver’s  
seat will be adjusted for the person who  
opens the door first.  
– Unlock the door using the key blade.  
When the car is locked, the lock buttons on  
the inside of the doors retract.  
NOTE  
An LED on the inside of the door in question  
illuminates, see page 108.  
When the driver’s door is unlocked using  
the key blade and is opened, the alarm is  
triggered. It is deactivated by inserting the  
remote control in the ignition switch. See  
page 111.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
103  
05 Locks and alarm  
Keyless drive (option)  
Antenna location  
Personal preferences  
The Keyless Drive system can have personal  
preferences applied, see page 62.  
WARNING  
1
2
3
People with pacemaker operations should  
not come closer than 22 cm to the keyless  
system’s antennae with their pacemaker.  
This is to prevent disturbances between the  
pacemaker and the keyless system.  
4
5
6
05  
The keyless system has a number of inte-  
grated antennae located around the car:  
1. Rear bumper, inside centre  
2. Cargo area, central and furthest in under  
the floor  
3. Door handle, left  
4. Centre console, under the rear section  
5. Door handle, right  
6. Centre console, under the front  
section.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
104  
05 Locks and alarm  
Battery in remote control  
Dispose of the old battery in an environmen-  
tally-responsible manner.  
Weak remote control battery  
Replacing the remote control battery  
When the battery runs down and full func-  
tionality cannot be guaranteed, the informa-  
tion symbol illuminates and the REMOTE  
BATTERY LOW VOLTAGE appears on the  
display.  
05  
If the locks repeatedly fail to respond to sig-  
nals from the remote control at a normal  
distance, the battery should be replaced  
(type CR 2450, 3 V).  
– Place the remote control with the keypad  
downward and prise up the cover using a  
small screwdriver.  
– Remove the cover.  
– Carefully examine how the battery’s  
+ and sides are fitted (there is a diagram  
under the cover).  
– Prise away and replace the battery. Avoid  
touching the battery and its terminals with  
your fingers.  
– Refit the cover and press it in.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
105  
05 Locks and alarm  
Locking and unlocking  
Locking/unlocking the car from  
outside  
Boot lid  
WARNING  
Be aware that you can be locked in the car if  
it is locked from the outside with the remote  
control. You cannot leave the car using any  
of the controls inside the car.  
Unlocking  
Unlocking the boot lid only:  
For cars with the keyless system, see  
page 102.  
– Press the boot lid unlock button on the  
remote control.  
Unlocking  
The remote control unlock button can unlock  
the car in two different ways (select option in  
personal preferences, see page 62):  
Global opening  
Press and hold the unlock button to open all  
side windows simultaneously.  
Locking  
If the doors are locked when the boot lid is  
closed then it remains unlocked. Lock with  
the remote control or from inside to lock the  
both doors and the boot lid.  
• with one press unlock both doors as well  
as the boot lid  
The function can be used to quickly air the  
car in hot weather for example.  
• with one press unlock the driver’s door  
and with a second press unlock the other  
door and the boot lid.  
Different personal settings can be made, see  
page 62.  
05  
Locking  
The remote control locks the doors and the  
boot lid simultaneously. The door lock but-  
1
tons and inside handles are disengaged .  
The fuel filler flap cannot be opened if the car  
is locked with the remote control.  
NOTE  
The car can be locked even if a door or the  
boot lid is open. When the door is closed  
there is a risk that the keys will be locked in.  
(Applies to certain markets.)  
1
Applies to certain markets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
106  
05 Locks and alarm  
Locking and unlocking  
Opening the boot lid mechanically  
Automatic relocking  
If none of the doors or the boot lid is opened  
within two minutes of unlocking, all are  
locked again automatically (does not apply to  
locking from inside). This function prevents  
the car from being left unlocked unintention-  
ally. For cars with alarms, see page 111.  
05  
If the car’s electrical systems are temporarily  
out of order then the boot lid can be opened  
mechanically with the remote control’s  
detachable key blade. For information on  
removing the key blade, see page 98.  
– Fold forward the left-hand seat’s backrest  
to access the keyhole down at the floor.  
Insert the key blade and turn it 110 degrees  
clockwise.  
IMPORTANT  
The roof must be fully closed or fully open  
before mechanical opening can be used for  
the boot lid.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
107  
05 Locks and alarm  
Locking and unlocking  
– Pull the handle twice to unlock and open  
the doors.  
Locking/unlocking the car from inside  
Automatic locking  
When the speed of the car exceeds 7 km/h  
the doors and boot lid can be locked auto-  
matically.  
Lock indicator  
When the function is activated and the doors  
have been locked they can be opened in two  
ways:  
• pull one of the door handles twice  
• press the unlock button by the door han-  
dle.  
The function can be activated/deactivated by  
means of personal preferences, see page 62.  
05  
The doors and the boot lid can be locked or  
unlocked simultaneously using the lock but-  
ton by the door handle.  
An LED on the inside of the door in question  
illuminates for approx. five minutes after the  
car has been locked with the remote control,  
or with the Keyless drive system when the  
engine is switched off, see page 103.  
Unlocking  
– Press the upper section of the lock button.  
The door cannot be unlocked by pulling up  
the lock button.  
When the car is locked from the inside the  
LEDs acknowledge the locking with one long  
flash. Unlocking from the inside is acknowl-  
edged by two short flashes.  
Locking  
– Press the lower section of the lock button.  
Opening the doors  
When the doors are locked from the inside:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
108  
05 Locks and alarm  
Locking and unlocking  
The light in the button is illuminated until the  
car is locked with the key or the remote con-  
trol.  
Temporary deactivation  
Deadlocks  
When deadlocked, the doors cannot be  
opened from the inside if they are locked.  
1
2
The deadlocks are activated with the remote  
control and are set after a 25 second delay  
after the doors have been locked.  
NOTE  
If the car is equipped with an alarm:  
Remember that the car’s alarm is armed  
when the car is locked.  
If any of the doors are opened from the in-  
side then the alarm will be triggered.  
The car can only be unlocked from a dead-  
lock state with the remote control. The doors  
can also be opened from the outside with the  
key.  
A message remains on the display as long as  
the key is in the ignition switch.  
The detectors are reactivated and deadlocks  
re-engaged the next time the car is started.  
05  
1. Deactivation of the deadlocks and detectors.  
2. No function.  
WARNING  
If someone is going to stay in the car but the  
doors must be locked from the outside, then  
the deadlocks function can be temporarily  
deactivated as follows:  
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car  
without first deactivating the deadlocks to  
avoid the risk of anyone being locked in.  
– Insert the key into the ignition switch, turn  
it to position II and then back to position I  
or 0.  
– Press button (1).  
If the car is equipped with an alarm with  
movement and tilt detectors, then these are  
also deactivated at the same time, see  
page 110.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
109  
05 Locks and alarm  
Alarm (option)  
Alarm system  
Alarm light on instrument panel  
When the alarm is armed, it continually moni-  
tors all alarm inputs.  
NOTE  
Do not attempt to repair or modify alarm  
system components. All such attempts  
could affect the terms of insurance.  
The alarm is triggered if:  
• a door, the bonnet or boot lid opens.  
• a non-approved key is used in the ignition  
or if an attempt is made to force the lock.  
Arming the alarm  
– Press the lock button on the remote con-  
trol. A long flash from the car’s direction  
indicators confirms that the alarm is  
armed and that the doors are locked.  
• a movement is detected in the passenger  
compartment (if fitted with a movement  
detector).  
• the car is raised or towed away (if fitted  
with a tilt detector).  
IMPORTANT  
• a battery cable is disconnected.  
05  
The alarm is fully armed when the car’s di-  
rection indicators have made one long flash  
and the light on the instrument panel flash-  
es once every other second.  
• anyone tries to disconnect the siren.  
A light on the instrument panel indicates the  
alarm system’s status:  
NOTE  
• Light not illuminated – the alarm is not  
armed.  
When the roof is closed, the alarm functions  
in the same way as when it is open, i.e.  
movement detected in the passenger com-  
partment triggers an alarm.  
Disarming the alarm  
• The light flashes rapidly after disarming  
the alarm and until the ignition is switched  
on – the alarm has been triggered.  
– Press the unlock button on the remote  
control. Two short flashes from the car’s  
direction indicators confirm that the alarm  
is disarmed and that the doors are  
unlocked.  
• The lamp flashes once every other second  
after the car’s direction indicators have  
made one long flash signal – Alarm is  
armed.  
If there is a fault in the alarm system, a mes-  
sage appears on the information display.  
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
110  
05 Locks and alarm  
Alarm (option)  
Automatic alarm activation  
Remote control not working  
This function prevents you accidentally leav-  
ing the car without the alarm on.  
If none of the doors or the boot lid is opened  
within two minutes of disarming the alarm  
(and the car has been unlocked with the  
remote control), then the alarm is automati-  
cally rearmed, and the car is locked at the  
same time.  
Deactivating a triggered alarm  
– Press the unlock button on the remote  
control or insert the key in the ignition  
switch.  
05  
Confirmation is given by two short flashes  
from the direction indicators.  
If for some reason the remote control is not  
working, the alarm can still be switched off  
and the car started as follows:  
Alarm signals  
When the alarm is triggered, the following  
happens:  
– Open the driver’s door with the key blade.  
The alarm is triggered and the siren  
sounds.  
• A siren sounds for no more than  
25 seconds. The siren has its own battery  
which is used if the car battery has insuffi-  
cient charge or is disconnected.  
– On cars with the keyless drive system:  
First remove the knob by pressing in the  
catch (1) and pulling out (2).  
• The direction indicators flash for five min-  
utes or until the alarm is deactivated.  
– Insert the remote control into the ignition  
switch (3). The alarm is deactivated. The  
alarm light flashes rapidly until the ignition  
key is turned to position II.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
111  
05 Locks and alarm  
Alarm (option)  
If the car is equipped with deadlocks, they  
are deactivated at the same time, see  
page 109.  
Reduced alarm level  
The detectors are reactivated and deadlocks  
re-engaged the next time the car is started.  
1
2
05  
1. Deactivation of the deadlocks and detectors.  
2. No function.  
To avoid inadvertently triggering the alarm,  
for example during a ferry crossing, the  
movement and tilt detectors can be tempo-  
rarily deactivated as follows:  
– Turn the ignition key to position II and then  
back to position 0. Remove the key.  
– Press button (1). The light in the button is  
illuminated until the car is locked.  
A message is shown on the display as long  
as the key remains in the ignition switch (and  
for one minute after the key is removed).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
112  
05 Locks and alarm  
Alarm (option)  
– Arm the alarm. Remain in the car and lock  
the doors with the button on the remote  
control.  
Testing the alarm system  
Testing the movement detector in the  
passenger compartment  
– Open all windows.  
– Arm the alarm. Arming the alarm is con-  
firmed by the light flashing slowly.  
– Wait 30 seconds.  
– Open the bonnet with the handle under  
the dashboard. A siren should sound and  
all direction indicators flash.  
– Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car  
with the remote control.  
– Wait 30 seconds.  
– Test the movement detector in the pas-  
senger compartment, such as by lifting  
out a bag from a seat. A siren should then  
sound and all direction indicators should  
flash.  
– Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car  
with the remote control.  
05  
Testing the door alarm  
– Arm the alarm.  
– Wait 30 seconds.  
– Unlock the driver’s door with the key  
blade.  
– Open one of the doors. A siren should  
sound and all direction indicators flash.  
– Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car  
with the remote control.  
Testing the alarm for the bonnet  
– Sit in the car and deactivate the move-  
ment detector.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
113  
General ................................................................................................... 116  
Refuelling ............................................................................................... 118  
Starting the engine ................................................................................. 119  
Diesel particle filter (DPF) ....................................................................... 120  
Ignition switch and steering lock ............................................................ 121  
Keyless drive .......................................................................................... 122  
Manual gearbox ..................................................................................... 123  
Automatic gearbox ................................................................................. 125  
Brake system ......................................................................................... 128  
DSTC – Stability and traction  
control system ........................................................................................ 130  
Parking assistance (option) .................................................................... 132  
BLIS – Blind Spot Information  
System (option) ...................................................................................... 135  
Towing and recovery .............................................................................. 138  
Jump starting ......................................................................................... 140  
Driving with a trailer ............................................................................... 141  
Towing equipment .................................................................................. 143  
Detachable towbar ................................................................................. 145  
Loading .................................................................................................. 150  
Adjusting headlamp pattern ................................................................... 151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
114  
STARTING AND DRIVING  
06  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
06 Starting and driving  
General  
Avoid overheating the cooling system  
• Maintain a low speed when driving with a  
trailer up long, steep ascents.  
Economical driving  
Driving in water  
The car can be driven through water at a  
maximum depth of 25 cm at a maximum  
speed of 10 km/h. Extra caution should be  
exercised when passing through flowing  
water.  
Driving economically means driving smoothly  
while thinking ahead and adjusting your driv-  
ing style and speed to the prevailing condi-  
tions.  
• Do not turn the engine off immediately you  
stop after a hard drive.  
• Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front  
of the grille if driving in extreme high  
temperatures.  
• Get the engine warmed up as soon as  
possible.  
IMPORTANT  
• Do not let the engine idle, but drive at light  
loads as soon as it is possible.  
Engine damage can occur if water enters  
the air filter.  
In greater depths, water can enter the trans-  
mission. This reduces the lubricating ability  
of the oils and shortens the service life of  
these systems.  
Avoid overheating the engine  
Do not exceed engine speeds of 4500 rpm  
(diesel engine: 3500 rpm) if driving with a  
trailer or caravan in hilly terrain. The oil tem-  
perature could then become too high.  
• A cold engine consumes more fuel than a  
warm one.  
• Avoid braking too hard.  
• Do not drive with unnecessary loads in the  
car.  
Open boot lid  
When driving in water, maintain a low speed  
and do not stop the car. When the water has  
been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly  
and check that full brake function is attained.  
Water and mud for example can make the  
brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake  
function.  
• Do not use winter tyres when the roads  
are dry.  
Avoid driving with the boot lid open. If it is  
necessary to drive with the boot lid open for  
a short distance:  
• Remove load carriers when they are not  
being used.  
06  
– Close all windows.  
• Avoid driving with open windows.  
– Set the air distribution to the windscreen  
and floor and run the fan at high speed.  
Slippery driving conditions  
Clean the electric contacts of the electric  
engine block heater and trailer coupling after  
driving in water and mud.  
Practise driving on slippery surfaces under  
controlled conditions to learn how the car  
reacts.  
WARNING  
Do not drive with the boot lid open. Toxic  
exhaust fumes can be drawn into the car  
through the cargo area.  
IMPORTANT  
Engine and cooling system  
Do not let the car stand with water over the  
sills for any long period of time. This could  
cause electrical malfunctions.  
In the event of stalling in water, do not try to  
restart. Tow the car out of the water.  
Under special conditions, for example when  
driving in hilly terrain, extreme heat or with  
heavy loads, there is a risk that the engine  
and cooling system will overheat.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
116  
06 Starting and driving  
General  
Do not overload the battery  
The electrical functions in the car load the  
battery to varying degrees. Avoid using the  
ignition position II when the engine is  
switched off. Use ignition position I instead,  
as less power is consumed.  
The 12 volt outlet in the cargo area supplies  
power even when the ignition key is  
removed.  
Examples of functions that use a lot of  
power:  
• ventilation fan  
• windscreen wipers  
• audio equipment (high volume)  
• parking lamps  
Also, be aware of different accessories that  
load the electrical system. Do not use func-  
tions which use a lot of power when the  
engine is switched off.  
06  
If the battery voltage is low, a message  
appears on the display. The energy-saving  
function shuts down certain functions or  
reduces the load on the battery by, for exam-  
ple, slowing the ventilation fan and switching  
off the audio equipment. Charge the battery  
by starting the engine.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
117  
06 Starting and driving  
Refuelling  
– Take out the cap.  
Pull the cord hanging on the hook.  
Opening the fuel filler flap  
– Hang up the cap on the inside of the fuel  
filler flap.  
When the fuel filler flap has opened, refit the  
cord and cover.  
Filling up with fuel  
NOTE  
Do not overfill the tank but fill until the pump  
nozzle cuts out.  
Put the petrol cap back after refuelling. Turn  
until one or more clear clicks are heard.  
NOTE  
Opening from the cargo area  
Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hot  
weather.  
Fuel of a lower quality than that specified on  
page 243 should not be used as engine  
power and fuel consumption can be nega-  
tively affected.  
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before  
refuelling.  
Open the fuel filler flap with the button on the  
lighting panel, see page 47. The engine must  
be switched off before the flap can be  
opened. The fuel flap is located on the rear  
right wing.  
WARNING  
06  
Fuel which spills onto the ground can be  
ignited by the exhaust fumes.  
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before  
starting to refuel.  
Never carry an activated mobile phone  
when refuelling as the ring signal could  
cause spark build-up and ignite petrol  
fumes, leading to fire and injury.  
Closing  
Manual opening of the fuel filler flap is easier  
when the roof is closed, and is used when it  
is not possible to open it from the passenger  
compartment.  
Push in the flap until you hear a click.  
Fuel cap  
– Turn the fuel cap until an obvious resist-  
ance is felt.  
Remove the cover over the lamp housing on  
the right-hand side of the cargo area.  
– Turn past the resistance until it comes to a  
stop.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
118  
06 Starting and driving  
Starting the engine  
Starting the engine  
Before starting the engine  
– Apply the parking brake.  
Petrol  
IMPORTANT  
Petrol  
– Turn the ignition key to position III.  
If the engine does not start within  
5–10 seconds, release the key and try  
again.  
Automatic gearbox  
– Gear selector in position P or N.  
Do not add cleaning additives to the petrol,  
unless recommended by Volvo.  
Manual gearbox  
Put the gear lever in neutral and hold the  
clutch pedal fully depressed. This is particu-  
larly important in very cold conditions.  
Diesel  
Diesel  
At low temperatures (–5 C to –40 C), a  
paraffin precipitate may form in the diesel  
fuel, which can lead to ignition problems.  
– Turn the ignition key to position II.  
An indicator symbol in the combined  
instrument panel shows that engine pre-  
heating is underway, see page 41.  
WARNING  
IMPORTANT  
Never remove the ignition key from the  
steering lock while driving or when the car is  
being towed. The steering lock could other-  
wise be activated, making it impossible to  
steer the car.  
The ignition key must be in position II when  
the car is being towed.  
– Turn the ignition key to position III when  
the indicator symbol goes out.  
Use special winter grade fuel during cold  
months.  
Autostart (5-cylinder)  
With the autostart function, there is no need  
to hold the ignition key (or ignition dial on  
cars with Keyless Drive, see page 122) in  
position III until the engine has started.  
06  
NOTE  
Turn the ignition key to the start position and  
then release. The starter motor then works  
automatically until the engine has started.  
The idling speed can be noticeably higher  
than normal for certain engine types during  
cold starting. This is so that the emissions  
system can reach normal operating temper-  
ature as quickly as possible, which mini-  
mises exhaust emissions and protects the  
environment.  
NOTE  
If the diesel engine is started in extreme  
cold without waiting for engine preheating,  
then the automatic start sequence can be  
delayed for a couple of seconds.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
119  
06 Starting and driving  
Diesel particle filter (DPF)  
1
symbol on the dashboard illuminates, and  
the message SOOT FILTER FULL SEE  
OWNER MANUAL is shown on the dash-  
board display.  
Diesel particle filter (DPF)  
Diesel cars may be equipped with a particle  
filter, which results in more efficient emission  
control. The particles in the exhaust gases  
are collected in the filter during normal driv-  
ing. So-called "regeneration" is started in  
order to burn away the particles and empty  
the filter. This requires the engine to have  
reached normal operating temperature.  
Start regeneration of the filter by driving the  
car until the engine reaches normal operating  
temperature, preferably on a main road or  
motorway. The car should then be driven for  
approximately 20 minutes more.  
Regeneration of the filter takes place auto-  
matically at an interval of 300 – 900 km  
depending on driving conditions. Regenera-  
tion normally takes between 10 and  
20 minutes. During this time fuel consump-  
tion may increase slightly.  
When regeneration is complete the message  
is cleared automatically.  
IMPORTANT  
If the filter fills up it may be incapable of  
functioning. Then it can be difficult to start  
the engine and there is a risk that the filter  
will have to be replaced.  
The rear window heating may be activated  
automatically to increase the load on the  
engine during regeneration without warning.  
06  
Use the parking heater (option) in cold  
weather so that the engine reaches normal  
operating temperature more quickly.  
Regeneration in cold weather  
If the car is frequently driven short distances  
in cold weather then the engine does not  
reach normal operating temperature. This  
means that regeneration of the diesel particle  
filter does not take place and the filter is not  
emptied.  
When the filter has become approximately  
80 % full of particles, the yellow information  
1
Certain markets.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
120  
06 Starting and driving  
Ignition switch and steering lock  
When the steering lock is activated  
If the front wheels are positioned so that  
there is tension in the steering lock, a warn-  
ing message may be shown on the informa-  
tion display and the car prevented from  
starting.  
Ignition keys and electronic  
immobiliser  
Ignition switch and steering lock  
0 – Locked position  
The steering lock is acti-  
vated when the key is  
removed from the lock.  
The ignition key must not hang with other  
keys or metal objects on the same key ring.  
The electronic immobiliser could be activated  
accidentally.  
– Remove the key and turn the steering  
wheel to release the tension.  
I – Radio position  
– Hold the steering wheel in this position.  
Reinsert the key and make a new attempt  
to start the car.  
Certain electrical compo-  
nents can be switched on.  
The engine’s electrical sys-  
tem is not activated.  
WARNING  
II – Driving position  
The key position when driv-  
ing. The car’s electrical sys-  
tem is energised.  
Never remove the ignition key from the igni-  
tion switch while driving or when the car is  
being towed. The steering lock could other-  
wise be activated, making it impossible to  
steer the car.  
III – Start position  
The starter motor is  
06  
WARNING  
engaged. Release the key,  
which springs back auto-  
matically to the driving posi-  
tion, once the engine has  
started.  
Always remove the ignition key from the  
ignition when leaving the car, especially if  
there are children in the car.  
Make sure the steering lock is activated  
when the car is left to reduce the risk of theft.  
A ticking sound may be heard if the key is  
between positions. Turn the key to position II  
and back to eliminate the sound.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
121  
06 Starting and driving  
Keyless drive  
General  
Starting the car  
Starting with the remote control  
– Depress the clutch pedal (cars with man-  
ual gearbox) or brake pedal (cars with  
automatic gearbox).  
Petrol engine  
– Press in and turn the ignition dial to  
position III.  
Diesel engine  
– First turn the ignition dial to position II and  
wait until the diesel indicator symbol in the  
combined instrument panel goes out, see  
page 41.  
– Following which, turn the ignition dial to  
position III.  
If the remote control battery is discharged  
then the Keyless Drive function does not  
work. In which case, start the car by using  
the remote control as ignition dial.  
The keyless drive function allows the car to  
be unlocked, driven and locked without the  
need for a key, see page 102.  
06  
The ignition switch ignition dial is used in the  
same way as the key. One precondition for  
starting the car is that the car’s remote con-  
trol is located inside the passenger compart-  
ment or the cargo area.  
1. Press in the catch in the ignition dial.  
2. Pull the ignition dial out from the igni-  
tion switch.  
3. Insert the remote control into the igni-  
tion switch and start in the same way  
as with the ignition dial.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
122  
06 Starting and driving  
Manual gearbox  
Gear positions, five-speed  
Reverse gear inhibitor, five-speed  
Gear positions, six-speed (petrol)  
Only engage reverse gear when the car is  
stationary. To engage reverse gear, the gear  
lever must first be put in position N. Reverse  
gear cannot therefore be engaged directly  
from fifth gear due to the reverse gear  
inhibitor.  
Depress the clutch pedal fully with each gear  
change. Remove your foot from the clutch  
pedal between gear changes! Follow the  
appropriate shifting pattern.  
Depress the clutch pedal fully with each gear  
change. Remove your foot from the clutch  
pedal between gear changes! Follow the  
appropriate shifting pattern.  
06  
For the best possible fuel economy, use the  
highest gear possible as often as possible.  
For the best possible fuel economy, use the  
highest gear possible as often as possible.  
It can be difficult to find the positions for fifth  
and sixth gear when the car is stationary as  
the reverse gear inhibitor (which blocks side-  
ways movement towards reverse) is then not  
activated.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
123  
06 Starting and driving  
Manual gearbox  
1
Reverse gear inhibitor, six-speed  
(petrol)  
Gear positions, six-speed (diesel)  
Reverse gear inhibitor, six-speed  
(diesel)  
Only engage reverse gear when the car is  
stationary.  
Depress the clutch pedal fully with each gear  
change. Remove your foot from the clutch  
pedal between gear changes! Follow the  
appropriate shifting pattern.  
Only engage reverse gear when the car is  
stationary. Engage reverse gear by pressing  
down the gear lever and moving it to the left.  
06  
NOTE  
Reverse gear is electronically blocked if the  
car is travelling faster than approx. 20 km/h.  
For the best possible fuel economy, use the  
highest gear possible as often as possible.  
1
Certain markets.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
124  
06 Starting and driving  
Automatic gearbox  
The gearbox is mechanically blocked when  
P position is engaged. Always apply the  
parking brake when parking the car.  
Geartronic automatic gear positions  
Geartronic manual gear positions  
The driver can also change gear manually  
using the Geartronic automatic gearbox. The  
car engine-brakes when the accelerator  
pedal is released.  
R – Reverse  
The car must be stationary when R is  
selected.  
Manual gearshift mode is obtained by mov-  
ing the lever from position D to the right-  
hand end position at M. The information dis-  
play shifts the indication from D to one of the  
figures 1-6, depending which gear is  
N – Neutral  
No gear is engaged and the engine can be  
started. Apply the parking brake when the  
car is stationary with the gear selector in  
position N.  
engaged just then, see page 39.  
Move the lever forwards towards + (plus) to  
change up a gear and release the lever,  
which returns to its rest position at M.  
Pull the lever back towards (minus) to  
change down a gear and release the lever.  
D – Drive  
D is the normal driving position. The car  
automatically shifts up and down depending  
on the level of acceleration and speed. The  
car should be stationary when D is selected  
from position R.  
P – Parking position  
Select position P when you wish to start the  
engine or park the car.  
The manual gearshift mode M can be  
selected at any time while driving.  
06  
To return to automatic driving mode: move  
the lever to the left-hand end position at D.  
IMPORTANT  
The car must be stationary when position P  
is selected.  
Geartronic automatically shifts down if the  
driver allows the speed to decrease lower  
than a level suitable for the selected gear, in  
order to avoid jerking and stalling.  
NOTE  
The brake pedal must be depressed to  
move the gear lever from the P position.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
125  
06 Starting and driving  
Automatic gearbox  
1
Kick-down  
Mechanical gear selector inhibitor  
Automatic gear selector inhibitor  
When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the  
way to the floor (beyond the position nor-  
mally regarded as full acceleration) a lower  
gear is immediately engaged. This is known  
as kick-down.  
Cars with an automatic gearbox have special  
safety systems:  
Keylock  
To remove the ignition key, the gear selector  
must be in the P position. The key is locked  
in all other positions.  
If the accelerator is released from the kick-  
down position, the gearbox automatically  
changes up.  
Parking position (P)  
Stationary car with engine running:  
Kick-down is used when maximum accelera-  
tion is needed, such as for overtaking.  
– Hold your foot on the brake pedal when  
moving the gear selector to another posi-  
tion.  
Safety function  
To prevent overrevving the engine, the gear-  
box control program has a protective down-  
shift inhibitor which prevents the kick-down  
function.  
Electric gear inhibitor – Shiftlock  
Parking position (P position)  
To be able to move the gear selector from the  
P position to other gear positions, the ignition  
key must be in position II and the brake  
pedal must be depressed.  
The gear selector can be moved forward and  
back freely between N and D. Other posi-  
tions are locked with a latch that is released  
with the inhibitor button on the gear selector.  
Geartronic does not permit downshifting/  
kick-down which would result in an engine  
speed high enough to damage the engine.  
Nothing happens if the driver still tries to shift  
down in this way at high engine speed – the  
original gear remains engaged.  
06  
With the inhibitor button depressed the lever  
can be moved forwards or backwards  
between P, R, N and D.  
Shiftlock – Neutral (N position)  
If the gear selector is in the N position and  
the car has been stationary for at least three  
seconds (irrespective of whether the engine  
is running) then the gear selector is locked in  
the N position.  
When kick-down is activated the car can  
change one or more gears at a time depend-  
ing on engine speed. The car changes up  
when the engine reaches its maximum speed  
in order to prevent damage to the engine.  
To be able to move the gear selector from the  
N position to another gear position, the brake  
pedal must be depressed and the ignition  
key must be in position II.  
1
Not on diesel cars in manual position.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
126  
06 Starting and driving  
Automatic gearbox  
Disengaging the gear selector  
inhibitor  
Cold start  
When starting in low temperatures, the gear  
changes can sometimes feel hard. This is  
due to the gearbox oil’s viscosity at low tem-  
peratures. To minimise engine emissions, the  
gearbox shifts up later than normal when the  
engine is started at low temperatures.  
NOTE  
Depending on the engine temperature when  
the engine is started, the idle speed after a  
cold start may be higher than normal for  
certain engine types.  
In certain cases, it may be necessary to  
move the car when it is not driveable, for  
example if the battery is flat. Proceed as fol-  
lows to move the car:  
06  
1. There is a small cover behind P-R-N-D  
on the gear selector panel. Open the rear  
edge.  
2. Fully insert the key blade from the  
remote control.  
3. Hold the key blade down and at the  
same time move the gear lever out of  
the P position.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
127  
06 Starting and driving  
Brake system  
engine braking more efficiently and requires  
the foot brake for only brief periods.  
Dampness can affect braking  
characteristics  
Brake servo  
If the car is rolling or is being towed with the  
engine turned off, the brake pedal must be  
pressed about five times harder than when  
the engine is running. If the brake pedal is  
pressed when the engine is started, you will  
feel the pedal drop. This is normal and due to  
the brake servo becoming active. This may  
be more noticeable if the car has emergency  
brake assistance (EBA).  
Brake components become wet when the  
car is driven in heavy rain, through pools of  
water or when the car is washed. This may  
alter brake pad friction characteristics so that  
there is a delay before braking effect is  
noticed.  
Bear in mind that driving with a trailer puts an  
additional load on the car’s brakes.  
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)  
The anti-lock braking system  
(ABS) prevents the wheels from  
locking up under braking.  
This means the ability to steer is  
maintained and it is easier to  
Press the brake pedal lightly from time to  
time if driving for long stretches in rain or  
slushy snow, as well as after setting off in  
very damp or cold weather. This warms up  
the braking surfaces and dries off any water.  
It is also recommended to do this before  
parking the car for a long period in such  
weather conditions.  
swerve to avoid a hazard, for example.  
WARNING  
After the engine has been started, the ABS  
will perform a brief self-test at a speed of  
about 20 km/h. This can be felt and heard as  
pulses in the brake pedal.  
The brake servo only works when the  
engine is running.  
NOTE  
If the brakes are used heavily  
To get the most out of the ABS:  
If braking with the engine switched off,  
press the brake pedal sharply once, not  
repeatedly.  
When driving in the Alps or other roads with  
similar characteristics, the car’s brakes are  
heavily loaded even if the brake pedal is not  
being depressed especially hard.  
• Press brake pedal with full force. Pulses  
will be felt.  
06  
• Steer the car in the direction of travel. Do  
not release the pressure on the pedal.  
Brake circuits  
Because speed is often low, the brakes are  
not cooled as effectively as when driving on  
flat roads at higher speed.  
Practice braking with the ABS system in a  
traffic-free area and in different weather con-  
ditions.  
This symbol illuminates if a brake  
circuit is not working.  
If a fault should occur in one of  
the circuits, it is still possible to  
brake the car. The brake pedal will travel fur-  
ther and may feel softer than normal. Harder  
pressure on the pedal is needed to produce  
the normal braking effect.  
So as not to overload the brakes, shift down  
when driving downhill instead of using the  
foot brake. Use the same gear driving down-  
hill as you would use driving uphill. This uses  
The ABS symbol illuminates for two seconds  
if there was a fault in the ABS system when  
the engine was last running.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
128  
06 Starting and driving  
Brake system  
Emergency brake assistance – EBA  
(Emergency brake assistance) In case of  
sudden braking, full-strength braking is pro-  
vided instantaneously. The EBA function  
senses when heavy braking is underway by  
registering how quickly the brake pedal is  
depressed. Continue braking without easing  
off on the brake pedal. The function is sus-  
pended when the pressure on the brake  
pedal eases. This function is always active  
and cannot be disengaged.  
NOTE  
When the EBA function is activated, the  
brake pedal sinks slightly more than usual,  
press (and hold) the brake pedal as long as  
necessary. Release the brake pedal to stop  
all braking.  
WARNING  
If the BRAKE and ABS warning symbols are  
illuminated at the same time, a fault may  
have occurred in the brake system. If the  
level in the brake fluid reservoir is normal,  
drive carefully to the nearest authorised  
Volvo workshop to have the brake system  
checked.  
06  
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the  
brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further be-  
fore topping up the brake fluid.  
The reason for the loss of brake fluid must  
be investigated.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
129  
06 Starting and driving  
DSTC – Stability and traction control system  
Operation  
General  
Reduced operation  
– Turn thumbwheel (A) until the DSTC menu  
The Dynamic Stability and Traction Control  
system (DSTC) improves the car’s traction  
and helps the driver to avoid skidding.  
is shown.  
B
DSTC ON means that the system function is  
unchanged.  
A pulsing sound may be noticed during brak-  
ing or acceleration when the system is in  
action. The car may accelerate more slowly  
than expected.  
DSTC SPIN CONTROL OFF means that sys-  
tem operation is reduced.  
A
– Press and hold RESET (B) until the DSTC  
menu is changed.  
Active Yaw Control  
At the same time the symbol  
illuminates  
The function limits the driving and brake  
force of the wheels individually in order to  
stabilise the car.  
as a reminder that the system has been  
reduced. The system remains reduced until  
the engine is next started.  
Spin Control  
WARNING  
The stability system is activated automati-  
cally each time the car is started.  
The function prevents the driving wheels  
from spinning against the road surface dur-  
ing acceleration.  
Suppressing system function may alter the  
driving characteristics of the car.  
System operation during skidding and accel-  
eration can be partially deactivated.  
06  
NOTE  
Traction control system  
Operation during skidding is delayed and so  
allows more skidding which provides greater  
freedom for dynamic driving.  
The function is active at low speed and trans-  
fers power from the driving wheel that is  
spinning to the one that is not.  
DSTC ON is shown for several seconds in  
the display and the  
each time the engine is started.  
symbol illuminates  
Traction in deep snow or sand is improved as  
acceleration is no longer limited.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
130  
06 Starting and driving  
DSTC – Stability and traction control system  
Messages in the information display  
Symbols in the combined instrument  
panel  
TRACTION CONTROL TEMPORARILY OFF  
means that the system has been temporarily  
reduced due to excessive brake disc temper-  
ature.  
DSTC system  
The function is reactivated automatically  
when the brakes have cooled.  
Information  
ANTI-SKID SERVICE REQUIRED means that  
the system has been disabled due to a fault.  
– Stop the car in a safe place and turn off  
the engine.  
If the symbols  
the same time, read the message on the  
information display.  
and  
are displayed at  
If the message remains when the engine is  
restarted, drive to an authorised Volvo  
workshop.  
If the symbol  
appears alone then it may  
appear as follows:  
• Flashing light means that the DSTC sys-  
tem is now being activated.  
06  
• Constant glow for two seconds means  
system check when the engine is started.  
• Constant glow after starting the engine or  
while driving means that there is a fault in  
the DSTC system.  
• Constant glow after deactivation reminds  
that the DSTC system has been reduced.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
131  
06 Starting and driving  
Parking assistance (option)  
Variants  
General information on parking  
Rear parking assistance only  
The system is automatically engaged when  
the car is started.  
1
assistance  
Parking assistance is available in two vari-  
ants:  
• Rear only  
Rear parking assistance is activated when  
reverse gear is engaged and the message  
Park Assist active, Exit to deactivate is  
shown on the audio system display.  
• Both front and rear.  
Function  
The frequency of the signal increases the  
shorter the distance to an obstacle in front of  
or behind the car. If the volume of another  
sound source from the audio system is high,  
this is automatically muted.  
If the system is switched off, the display  
shows Park Assist deactivated Enter to  
activate as soon as reverse gear is engaged.  
To change the settings, see page 62.  
The distance covered behind the car is about  
1.5 metres. The signal comes from the rear  
loudspeakers.  
The tone becomes constant at a distance of  
about 30 cm. If there are obstacles within this  
distance both behind and in front of the car,  
the signal alternates between left and right-  
hand speakers.  
Parking assistance front and rear.  
Limitations  
Parking assistance is used as an aid to park-  
ing. A signal indicates the distance to a  
detected obstacle.  
The system must be deactivated when  
reversing with a trailer, or bike carrier on the  
towbar or similar. Otherwise the trailer or bike  
carrier would trigger the sensors.  
06  
WARNING  
NOTE  
Parking assistance does not relinquish the  
driver’s own responsibility during parking.  
The sensors have blind spots where obsta-  
cles cannot be detected. Be aware of chil-  
dren and animals near the car.  
Rear parking assistance is deactivated au-  
tomatically when towing a trailer if a Volvo  
genuine trailer cable is used.  
1
Depending on the market, the Parking  
assistance system may be either standard,  
option or accessory.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
132  
06 Starting and driving  
Parking assistance (option)  
Limitations  
Parking assistance both front and rear  
Fault indicator  
Front parking assistance cannot be com-  
bined with auxiliary lamps because the sen-  
sors are affected by the auxiliary lamps.  
If the information symbol illumi-  
nates with constant glow and the  
display shows PARK ASSIST  
SERVICE REQUIRED then park-  
ing assistance is disengaged.  
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop for  
attention.  
Rear  
Rear parking assistance is activated when  
reverse gear is engaged.  
The distance covered to the rear of the car is  
about 1.5 metres. The signal for obstacles  
behind comes from the rear loudspeakers.  
IMPORTANT  
In certain conditions the parking assistance  
system may produce incorrect warning sig-  
nals that are caused by external sound  
sources that emit the same ultrasonic fre-  
quencies that the system works with.  
Limitations  
See the previous section Rear parking  
assistance only.  
Examples of such sources include horns,  
wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and  
exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.  
Button for Off/On (here lowest button).  
The system is automatically activated when  
the car is started and the lamp in the switch  
for Off/On is illuminated. If parking assist-  
ance is deactivated with the button, then the  
lamp goes out.  
06  
Front  
Front parking assistance is active at speeds  
below 15 km/h. The system is deactivated at  
higher speeds. The system is reactivated  
when the speed falls below 10 km/h again.  
The distance covered to the front of the car is  
about 0.8 metres. The signal for obstacles in  
front comes from the front loudspeakers.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
133  
06 Starting and driving  
Parking assistance (option)  
Cleaning the sensors  
Parking assistance sensors.  
The sensors must be cleaned regularly to  
ensure that they work properly. Clean them  
with water and car shampoo.  
06  
NOTE  
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors  
may cause incorrect warning signals.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
134  
06 Starting and driving  
BLIS – Blind Spot Information System (option)  
attention to vehicles moving in the same  
direction in the so-called "blind spot".  
General  
Blind spots  
B
The system is designed to work most effec-  
tively when driving in dense traffic on multi-  
lane highways.  
2
A
BLIS is based on digital camera technology.  
The cameras (1) are located under the door  
mirrors.  
When a camera has detected a vehicle inside  
the blind spot zone the indicator lamp (2) illu-  
minates with a constant glow.  
3
1
NOTE  
The light illuminates on the side of the car  
where the system has detected the vehicle.  
If the car is overtaken on both sides at the  
same time then both lights illuminate.  
Rearview mirror with BLIS system.  
A = approx. 3.0 m, B = approx. 9.5 m  
1. BLIS camera  
2. Indicator lamp  
3. BLIS symbol  
When BLIS operates  
The system operates when the car is driven  
at a speed above 10 km/h.  
06  
BLIS advises the driver with a message if a  
fault arises in the system. If for example the  
system’s cameras are obscured then the  
BLIS indicator lamp flashes and the instru-  
ment panel’s display shows a message. In  
such cases, check and clean the lenses. If  
necessary, the system can be switched off  
temporarily by pressing the BLIS button, see  
page 136.  
Overtaking  
WARNING  
The system is designed to react if you over-  
take another vehicle at a speed of up to  
10 km/h faster than the other vehicle.  
The system is a supplement to, not a  
replacement for, a safe driving style and use  
of the rearview mirrors. It can never replace  
the driver’s attention and responsibility. The  
responsibility for changing lanes safely  
always rests with the driver.  
The system is designed to react if you are  
overtaken by a vehicle travelling up  
to 70 km/h faster than your vehicle.  
BLIS is an information system that under cer-  
tain conditions can help to draw the driver’s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
135  
06 Starting and driving  
BLIS – Blind Spot Information System (option)  
Activating/deactivating  
WARNING  
WARNING  
BLIS does not work in sharp bends.  
BLIS does not work when the car is revers-  
ing.  
A wide trailer coupled to the car can con-  
ceal other vehicles in adjacent lanes. It can  
prevent the vehicle in the screened area  
from being detected by BLIS.  
The system does not react to bicycles or  
mopeds.  
The BLIS cameras can be disrupted by in-  
tensive light or when driving in the dark  
when there are no light sources (e.g. street  
lighting or other vehicles). The system may  
then interpret the lack of light as if the cam-  
eras have been blocked.  
In both cases a message is shown on the  
information display.  
When driving in such conditions system  
performance may be temporarily reduced  
and a text message is shown, see  
page 137.  
Daylight and darkness  
In daylight the system reacts to the shape of  
the surrounding vehicles. The system is  
designed to detect motor vehicles such as  
cars, trucks, buses and motorcycles.  
Button for activating/deactivating.  
If the message disappears automatically  
then BLIS has returned to normal function-  
ality.  
The BLIS cameras have limitations similar  
to the human eye, i.e. they "see" worse in  
heavy snowfall or thick fog for example.  
In darkness the system reacts to the head-  
lamps of surrounding vehicles. Vehicles with  
headlamps that are switched off are not  
detected by the system. This means for  
example that the system does not react to a  
trailer without headlamps which is towed  
behind a car or truck.  
BLIS is activated when the engine is started.  
The indicator lamps in the door panels flash  
three times when BLIS is activated.  
06  
The system can be deactivated/activated by  
pressing BLIS.  
When BLIS is deactivated the light in the but-  
ton goes out and a text message is shown on  
the dashboard display.  
When BLIS is activated the light in the button  
illuminates, a new text message is shown on  
the display and the indicator lamps in the  
door panels flash three times. Press the  
READ button to clear the text message. For  
more information on messages, see page 44.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
136  
06 Starting and driving  
BLIS – Blind Spot Information System (option)  
BLIS system message  
Text on the  
display  
Cleaning  
In order to work most effectively the BLIS  
camera lenses must be clean. The lenses can  
be cleaned with a soft cloth or damp sponge.  
Clean the lenses carefully so that they are not  
scratched.  
Specification  
BLIND-SPOT INFO BLIS system on.  
SYSTEM ON  
BLIS FUNCTION  
REDUCED  
The BLIS camera is  
disrupted by fog or  
strong sunlight, for  
example, shining  
directly into the  
camera.  
The camera resets  
itself when the envi-  
ronment has returned  
to normal.  
IMPORTANT  
Reflection from shiny wet road surface.  
The lenses are electrically heated to melt ice  
or snow. If necessary, brush snow away  
from the lenses.  
Limitations  
In some situations the BLIS indicator lamp  
may illuminate despite there being no other  
vehicle within the blind spot.  
BLIND-SPOTSYST One or both cameras  
blocked.  
Clean the lenses.  
CAMERA  
BLOCKED  
NOTE  
Own shadow on large, light, smooth surface,  
e.g. noise barrier or concrete road surface.  
If the BLIS indicator lamp illuminates on iso-  
lated occasions despite there being no  
other vehicle within the blind spot then this  
does not mean that a fault has arisen in the  
system.  
06  
BLIND-SPOTSYST Blind spot syst.  
disengaged.  
SERVICE  
REQUIRED  
Contact an authorised  
Volvo workshop.  
In the event of a fault in the BLIS system  
the display shows the text BLIS Serv.  
required.  
BLIND-SPOT INFO BLIS system off.  
SYSTEM OFF  
Here are several examples of situations  
where the BLIS indicator lamp may illuminate  
even if there is no other vehicle within the  
blind spot.  
IMPORTANT  
Low sun in the camera.  
Repair of the BLIS system components  
must only be performed by an authorised  
Volvo workshop.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
137  
06 Starting and driving  
Towing and recovery  
than 80 km. The car must always be towed  
facing forward.  
Never tow the car to bump start it  
Recovery  
If only partially raised, cars with automatic  
gearbox must not be transported at speeds  
above 80 km/h or further than 80 km. During  
such transport, the wheels must always roll  
forward.  
Jump start the car with a donor battery if the  
battery is flat and the engine does not start.  
Do not bump start the car.  
WARNING  
The steering lock stays in the position it was  
in when the power was cut off. The steering  
lock must be unlocked before towing.  
IMPORTANT  
Bump starting the car can damage the cata-  
lytic converter.  
The ignition key must be in position II.  
Never remove the ignition key from the igni-  
tion switch while driving or when the car is  
being towed.  
Towing  
Find out the highest legal speed for towing  
before towing the car.  
NOTE  
If the car is de-energised then the steering  
lock must be unlocked using a donor bat-  
tery before towing can be started.  
– Turn the ignition switch to position II and  
unlock the steering lock so that the car  
can be steered, see page 121.  
– The ignition key must remain in position II  
while the car is being towed.  
WARNING  
06  
The brake servo and power steering do not  
work when the engine is switched off. The  
brake pedal must be pressed about five  
times harder than normal, and the steering  
will be considerably heavier than normal.  
Automatic gearbox  
– Move the gear selector to position N.  
Manual gearbox  
– Move gear lever into neutral.  
– Ensure the tow rope is always taut to  
avoid violent jerks. Keep your foot on the  
brake pedal.  
Cars with automatic gearbox must not be  
towed at speeds above 80 km/h or further  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
138  
06 Starting and driving  
Towing and recovery  
Towing eye  
1
2
3
Use the towing eye if the car needs to be  
towed on the road. The towing eye is  
attached in the recess on the right-hand side  
of the front or rear bumper.  
– After use, unscrew the towing eye and  
return it in the cargo area. Refit the cover  
on the bumper.  
NOTE  
On certain cars with fitted towbar the tow-  
ing eye cannot be secured in the rear  
mounting. In which case, secure the tow  
rope in the towbar.  
06  
IMPORTANT  
Fitting the towing eye  
– Take out the towing eye which is located  
in the bag in the ski hatch or together with  
the spare wheel.  
The towing eye is only designed for towing  
on roads, not for pulling the car unstuck or  
out of a ditch. Call a recovery service for as-  
sistance.  
For this reason it is advisable to store the  
towbar’s towball in the car, see page 148.  
– Release the cover (1) on the bumper by  
pressing on the marking on the lower edge  
of the cover.  
– Screw in the towing eye (3) firmly, right in  
up to the flange. Use the wheel wrench to  
tighten the towing eye.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
139  
06 Starting and driving  
Jump starting  
– Connect the red jump lead between the  
positive terminal on the donor battery (1+)  
and the one on the battery of your car (2+).  
Starting with a donor battery  
WARNING  
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas,  
which is highly explosive. One spark, which  
can be generated if you connect the jump  
leads incorrectly, is sufficient to make the  
battery explode.  
The battery contains sulphuric acid, which  
can cause serious burns. If the acid comes  
into contact with eyes, skin or clothing,  
flush with large quantities of water.  
– Connect one of the clamps from the black  
jump lead to the donor battery’s negative  
terminal (3–).  
– Connect the other end of the black jump  
lead to the earthing point (4–) by the left-  
hand strut tower.  
– Start the engine of the "donor car". Let the  
engine run a few minutes at a speed  
slightly higher than idle (1500 rpm).  
If acid splashes into the eyes, seek medical  
attention immediately.  
– Start the engine of the car with the flat  
battery.  
– Remove the jump leads, first the black and  
then the red. Ensure that neither of the  
black jump lead’s clips comes into contact  
with the battery’s positive terminal or the  
crocodile clip on the red jump lead.  
If the battery in the car has become flat, you  
can "borrow" electric current from either a  
separate battery or the battery in another car.  
Always make sure the crocodile clips on the  
jump leads are attached securely to eliminate  
sparks during the start attempt.  
06  
IMPORTANT  
Do not touch the crocodile clips during the  
start procedure. This could cause sparking.  
When jump starting the car, the following  
steps are recommended to avoid risk of  
explosion:  
– Turn the ignition key to position 0.  
– Ensure that the donor battery is 12 volt.  
– If the donor battery is in another car,  
switch off the engine in the other car and  
ensure that the cars do not touch one  
another.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
140  
06 Starting and driving  
Driving with a trailer  
• Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is  
brand new. Wait until it has been driven at  
least 1000 km.  
General  
Trailer weights  
Information on permitted trailer weights, see  
page 234.  
The load capacity is affected by extra acces-  
sories mounted on the car, such as a towbar,  
load carriers, space box, the passengers’  
combined weight etc. as well as the load on  
the towball. The load capacity of the car is  
reduced by the number of passengers and  
their weight.  
• The brakes are loaded much more than  
usual on long and steep downhill slopes.  
Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your  
speed.  
WARNING  
Follow the stated recommendations for  
trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer  
may be difficult to control in the event of  
sudden movement and braking.  
• The engine is loaded more heavily than  
usual when driving with a trailer.  
If the towing bracket is fitted by an author-  
ised Volvo workshop, then the car is deliv-  
ered with the necessary equipment for driv-  
ing with a trailer.  
• The engine and gearbox can overheat if  
the car is driven with a heavy load in hot  
weather. If the temperature gauge for the  
engine’s cooling system goes into the red  
zone, stop and let the engine idle for a few  
minutes. The automatic gearbox responds  
through a built-in protection system. See  
the message on the information display. If  
the car overheats, the air conditioning may  
be switched off temporarily.  
NOTE  
The stated maximum permitted trailer  
weights are those permitted by Volvo.  
National vehicle regulations can further limit  
trailer weights and speeds. Towbars can be  
certified for higher towing weights than the  
car can actually tow.  
• The car’s towing bracket must be of an  
approved type.  
• If the towbar is retrofitted, check with your  
Volvo dealer that the car is fully equipped  
for driving with a trailer.  
• Distribute the load on the trailer so that the  
weight on the towing bracket follows the  
specified maximum towball load.  
• In the interests of safety, speed should be  
restricted to 80 km/h, even if the laws of  
certain countries allow for higher speeds.  
06  
• Increase the tyre pressure to the recom-  
mended pressure for a full load. For tyre  
pressure decal location, see page 159.  
• Move the gear selector to parking  
position P when parking an automatic car  
with a hitched trailer. Always use the park-  
ing brake. Block the wheels with chocks  
when parking a car with hitched trailer on  
a hill.  
• Clean the towbar regularly and grease the  
1
towball .  
1
Does not apply to the towball if using a stabi-  
liser hitch.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
141  
06 Starting and driving  
Driving with a trailer  
Automatic gearbox, driving with a  
trailer  
Diesel engine with manual gearbox,  
driving with a trailer  
If the car is driven with a major load in a hot  
climate, the engine cooling fan can be  
replaced with one of a greater capacity than  
the standard model. Check with your nearest  
Volvo dealer regarding the options for  
your car.  
Parking on a hill  
– Apply the parking brake (handbrake).  
– Move the gear selector to parking  
position P.  
Starting on a hill  
– Move the gear selector to driving  
position D.  
– Release the parking brake (handbrake).  
Steep inclines  
• Select an appropriate manual gear posi-  
tion when climbing steep inclines or at low  
speeds. This prevents the gearbox from  
changing up and keeps the gearbox oil  
cooler.  
06  
• Do not use a higher manual gear than the  
engine can "handle". It is not always eco-  
nomical to drive in high gears.  
• Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of  
more than 15 %.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
142  
06 Starting and driving  
Towing equipment  
Towbars  
Trailer cable  
The towball must be cleaned and greased  
regularly. If a towball hitch with vibration  
damper is used, it is not necessary to grease  
the towball.  
If the car is equipped with a detachable tow-  
bar, the towball mounting instructions must  
be followed carefully, see page 145.  
WARNING  
Be sure to attach the trailer’s safety cable to  
the correct place.  
WARNING  
An adapter is required if the car’s towbar has  
13 pin electrics and the trailer has 7 pin  
electrics. Use an adapter cable approved by  
Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag on  
the ground.  
If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable  
towbar:  
Follow the assembly instructions for the  
towball section carefully.  
The towball section must be locked with the  
key before setting off.  
06  
Check that the indicator window shows  
green.  
NOTE  
Always take off the towball section after  
use. Keep it in the cargo area.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
143  
06 Starting and driving  
Towing equipment  
Specifications  
C
E
F
B
D
G
2 1  
1
H
H
2
I
A
J
K
J
Dimensions for mounting points (mm)  
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
06  
Fixed or detachable  
towbar  
1147  
68  
964  
482  
40  
141  
538  
150  
113  
100  
140  
1
2
Side member  
Ball centre  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
144  
06 Starting and driving  
Detachable towbar  
Fitting the towball  
2
2
1
1
3
– Ensure that the mechanism is in the  
unlocked position by turning the key  
clockwise.  
– Check that the indicator window (3) shows  
red. If the window does not show red,  
press in (1) and turn the locking wheel  
anticlockwise (2) until you hear a click.  
– Remove the protective cover.  
06  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
145  
06 Starting and driving  
Detachable towbar  
– Insert the towball section until you hear a  
click.  
– Check that the indicator window shows  
green.  
– Turn the key anticlockwise to the locked  
position. Remove the key from the lock.  
06  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
146  
06 Starting and driving  
Detachable towbar  
NOTE  
NOTE  
Check that the towball section is secure by  
pulling it up, down and back. If the towball  
section is not fitted correctly then it must be  
removed and refitted in accordance with  
the previous steps.  
The trailer’s safety cable must be secured in  
the towing bracket’s mounting eye.  
06  
IMPORTANT  
Only grease in the towball for the towing  
hitch, the remainder of the towball section  
should be clean and dry.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
147  
06 Starting and driving  
Detachable towbar  
Removing the towball  
2
1
– Push in the locking wheel (1) and turn it  
anticlockwise (2) until you hear a click.  
– Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it  
comes to a stop. Hold it in this position  
while pulling the towball rearward and  
upward.  
– Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the  
unlocked position.  
06  
WARNING  
Firmly secure the towbar’s loose towball if it  
is stored in the car’s cargo area.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
148  
06 Starting and driving  
Detachable towbar  
– Push on the protective cover.  
06  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
149  
06 Starting and driving  
Loading  
• Secure all loads to the load retaining eye-  
lets with straps or web lashings.  
General  
Load carriers  
To avoid damaging the car and for maximum  
possible safety while driving, it is recom-  
mended to use load carriers specially  
designed for your car by Volvo.  
The load capacity is affected by extra acces-  
sories mounted on the car, such as a towbar,  
the passengers’ combined weight etc. as  
well as towball load. The load capacity of the  
car is reduced by the number of passengers  
and their weight. For information on permit-  
ted weights, see page 234.  
WARNING  
A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a  
frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, carry  
the impact of an item weighing 1000 kg.  
Carefully follow the installation instructions  
supplied with the carriers.  
• Check periodically that the load carriers  
and load are properly secured. Lash the  
load securely with retaining straps.  
WARNING  
WARNING  
Never load cargo above the backrest.  
The protection provided by the inflatable  
curtain in the headlining may be compro-  
mised or eliminated by high loads.  
Always secure the load. During heavy brak-  
ing the load may otherwise shift, causing  
personal injury.  
The car’s driving characteristics change  
depending on how heavily it is loaded and  
how the load is distributed.  
• Distribute the load evenly over the load  
carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the  
bottom.  
• The size of the area exposed to the wind,  
and therefore fuel consumption, increase  
with the load’s size.  
Loading the cargo area  
Stop the engine and apply the parking brake  
when loading or unloading long objects. The  
gear lever or gear selector could be knocked  
out of position by long loads, which could set  
the car in motion.  
• Drive gently. Avoid quick accelerations,  
heavy braking and taking curves hard.  
06  
WARNING  
Place the load firmly against the backrest in  
front.  
The car’s centre of gravity and driving char-  
acteristics are altered by roof loads.  
• Put wide loads in the centre.  
• Heavy objects should be placed as low as  
possible.  
• Cover sharp edges with something soft to  
avoid damaging the upholstery.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
150  
06 Starting and driving  
Adjusting headlamp pattern  
Halogen headlamps  
Bi-Xenon headlamps  
Correct light pattern for left or right-  
hand traffic  
A
B
B
A
A
B
The headlamp control should be in  
position (A) for left-hand traffic and  
position (B) for right-hand traffic.  
The headlamp control should be in  
position (A) for left-hand traffic and  
position (B) for right-hand traffic.  
A. Headlamp pattern for left-hand traffic.  
B. Right-hand traffic.  
The headlamps’ projection can be adjusted  
to avoid dazzling other motorists. The correct  
pattern will also better illuminate the verge.  
06  
WARNING  
On cars with Bi-Xenon headlamps the  
replacement must be carried out by an  
authorised Volvo workshop. The headlamps  
must be handled with extreme care due to  
the high-voltage unit in the Xenon lamp.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
151  
General ................................................................................................... 154  
Tyre pressure .......................................................................................... 158  
Warning triangle and spare  
wheel ...................................................................................................... 160  
Changing wheels .................................................................................... 162  
Emergency puncture repair .................................................................... 164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
152  
WHEELS AND TYRES  
07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
07 Wheels and tyres  
General  
Driving characteristics and tyres  
Speed ratings  
New tyres  
The car has "Whole Vehicle Type Approval",  
which means that dimensions and speed rat-  
ings must not differ from those specified on  
the vehicle’s registration document. The only  
exception to these conditions is winter tyres  
(both those with metal studs and those with-  
out). If such a tyre is chosen, the car must not  
be driven faster than the speed rating of the  
tyre (for example, class Q can be driven at a  
maximum of 160 km/h).  
Tyres are perishable. After a  
few years they begin to  
harden at the same time as  
the friction capacity/charac-  
teristics gradually deterio-  
rate. Therefore aim to get as  
The tyres greatly affect the car’s driving char-  
acteristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre  
pressure and speed rating are important for  
how the car performs.  
When changing tyres, ensure that tyres of the  
same type and dimensions, and preferably  
also the same make, are fitted to all four  
wheels. Follow the recommended tyre pres-  
sures specified on the tyre pressure label,  
see page 158.  
fresh tyres as possible when you replace  
them. This is especially important with regard  
to winter tyres. The week and year of manu-  
facture, the tyre’s DOT marking (Department  
of Transportation), are stated with four digits,  
for example 1502. The tyre in the illustration  
was manufactured in week 15 of 2002.  
Remember that traffic regulations determine  
how fast a car can be driven, not the speed  
class of the tyres.  
Designation of dimensions  
The dimensions are stated on all car tyres.  
Example: 205/55R16 91 W.  
Note! Maximum permitted speeds indicated.  
Tyre age  
205  
55  
Section width (mm)  
All tyres older than six years should be  
checked by an expert even if they seem  
undamaged. The reason for this is that tyres  
age and decompose, even if they are hardly  
ever or never used. The function can there-  
fore be affected due to the tyre’s constituent  
materials being broken down. In such a case  
the tyre should then not be used. This also  
applies to spare tyres, winter tyres and tyres  
saved for future use. Examples of external  
signs which indicate that the tyre is unsuita-  
ble for use are cracks or discoloration.  
Q
T
160 km/h (used only on winter tyres)  
Ratio between section height and  
width (%)  
190 km/h  
210 km/h  
240 km/h  
270 km/h  
300 km/h  
H
V
R
Radial ply  
16  
91  
W
Rim diameter in inches (")  
Tyre load index (in this case 615 kg)  
Speed rating (in this case 270 km/h).  
W
Y
07  
The age of the tyre can be determined by the  
DOT marking, see illustration above.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
154  
07 Wheels and tyres  
General  
Tyres with tread wear indicators  
More even wear and maintenance  
NOTE  
Tread wear indicators are narrow treadless  
bands across the width of the tread. On the  
side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread  
Wear Indicator). When the tyre’s tread depth  
is down to 1.6 mm, the tread depth will be  
level in height with the tread wear indicators.  
Change to new tyres as soon as possible.  
Remember that tyres with little tread depth  
provide very poor grip in rain and snow.  
The legal provisions for the use of studded  
tyres vary from country to country.  
Tread depth  
Road conditions with ice, slush and low tem-  
peratures place considerably higher  
demands on tyres than summer conditions. It  
is therefore not recommended to drive on  
winter tyres that have a tread depth of less  
than four millimetres.  
Winter tyres  
Volvo recommends winter tyres with particu-  
lar dimensions. These are stated on the tyre  
pressure label, see page 158 for its location.  
The tyre dimensions are dependent on the  
engine variant. When driving on winter tyres,  
these must be fitted to all four wheels.  
Snow chains  
Snow chains may only be used on the front  
wheels. This also applies to all-wheel-drive  
cars.  
The correct tyre pressure results in more  
even wear, see page 159. To achieve the  
best traction and more even wear on the  
tyres, the regular switching of the front and  
rear tyres with each other is recommended.  
The first change should be after 5000 km and  
then at intervals of 10000 km, this is to avoid  
differences in tread depth. Tyres with the  
greatest tread depth should always be fitted  
to the rear wheels to decrease the risk of  
skidding. Contact an authorised Volvo work-  
shop for an inspection if you are uncertain  
about tread depth.  
Never drive faster than 50 km/h with snow  
chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this  
wears out both the snow chains and tyres.  
Never use quick-fit snow chains as the space  
between the brake discs and the wheels is  
too small .  
NOTE  
Ask a Volvo dealer which rim and tyre types  
are most suitable.  
07  
Studded tyres  
Studded winter tyres should be run in gently  
for 500–1000 km so the studs settle properly  
into the tyres. This gives the tyres, and espe-  
cially the studs, a longer lifespan.  
IMPORTANT  
Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equiva-  
lent chains designed for the car model, and  
tyre and rim dimensions. Consult an author-  
ised Volvo workshop.  
Wheels should be stored lying down or hang-  
ing up, and not standing up.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
155  
07 Wheels and tyres  
General  
Steel rims – standard wheel nuts (1)  
Steel rims are normally mounted with the  
standard wheel nuts, but the bulge acorn  
variety may also be used.  
Rims and wheel nuts  
Spare wheel Temporary Spare  
The spare wheel is only intended to be used  
for the short time it takes to get the normal  
wheel replaced or repaired. Replace the  
spare wheel as soon as possible with a nor-  
mal wheel. The car’s handling may be altered  
by the use of the spare wheel.  
1
2
1
WARNING  
Never use standard nuts for aluminium  
rims. The wheels can come loose.  
Never drive faster than 80 km/h with a spare  
wheel on the car.  
Aluminium rims – bulge acorn wheel  
nuts (2)  
Only use the bulge acorn variety of nuts with  
aluminium rims. These differ from other nut  
types as they have a rotating conical washer.  
IMPORTANT  
The car must never be driven fitted with  
more than one "Temporary Spare" wheel.  
Standard (1) and bulge acorn (2) wheel nuts  
NOTE  
Only use rims that are tested and approved  
by Volvo and which are Volvo genuine acces-  
sories. There are two types of wheel nut,  
depending on whether the rims are made of  
steel or aluminium. Tighten the wheel nuts to  
130 Nm. Check the torque with a torque  
wrench.  
These nuts may also be used with steel  
rims.  
Locking wheel nuts  
Locking wheel nuts can be used on both alu-  
minium and steel rims. If steel rims with lock-  
ing nuts are used in combination with wheel  
covers, the locking wheel nut should be  
mounted on the bolt nearest the air valve.  
Otherwise the wheel cover cannot be fitted to  
the rim.  
07  
IMPORTANT  
The wheel nuts should be tightened to  
130 Nm. Overtightening can damage the  
nuts and the bolts.  
1
Certain variants and markets.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
156  
07 Wheels and tyres  
General  
mounted incorrectly, the car’s braking char-  
acteristics and capacity to force rain, snow  
and slush out of the way are adversely  
affected.  
Summer and winter wheels  
Tyres with the greatest tread depth should  
always be fitted to the rear of the car (to  
decrease the risk of skidding).  
Wheels should be stored lying down or hang-  
ing up, and not standing up.  
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop if you  
are uncertain about tread depth.  
The arrow shows the tyre’s direction of rotation  
When summer and winter wheels are  
changed the wheels should be marked with  
which side of the car they were mounted on,  
for example L for left and R for right.  
Tyres with a tread pattern which are  
designed to only turn in one direction have  
the direction of rotation marked with an  
arrow.  
07  
The tyre should always rotate in the same  
direction throughout its lifespan. Tyres  
should only be switched between front and  
rear positions, never between left and right-  
hand sides, or vice versa. If the tyres are  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
157  
07 Wheels and tyres  
Tyre pressure  
Tyre pressure affects travelling comfort, road  
noise and steering characteristics.  
Checking the tyre pressure  
Check the tyre pressure regularly.  
Recommended tyre pressure  
NOTE  
Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a  
natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also  
varies depending on ambient temperature.  
Even after several kilometres of driving the  
tyres warm up and the pressure increases, so  
air must not be released if the pressure is  
checked when the tyres are warm, while the  
pressure must be increased if it is too low.  
Inadequately inflated tyres increase fuel con-  
sumption, shorten tyre lifespan and impair  
the car’s roadholding. Driving on tyres with  
tyre pressure that is too low could also result  
in the tyres overheating and disintegrating.  
The tyre pressure label on the driver’s side  
door pillar shows which pressures the tyres  
should have at different loads and speed  
conditions.  
For information on the correct tyre pressure,  
refer to the tyre pressure table on page 159.  
The specified tyre pressures refer to "cold  
tyres". ("Cold tyres" means the tyres are the  
same temperature as the ambient tempera-  
ture.)  
NOTE  
Full load in the car equates to the number of  
seats with seatbelts.  
07  
Stated on the decal:  
Fuel economy, ECO pressure  
• Tyre pressure for the car’s recommended  
wheel size  
At speeds under 160 km/h, the general tyre  
pressure for full load is recommended in  
order to obtain optimum fuel economy.  
• ECO pressure  
• Spare wheel pressure (Temporary Spare).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
158  
07 Wheels and tyres  
Tyre pressure  
Tyre pressure table  
Load, 1-3 persons  
Speed  
(km/h)  
Max. load  
Front (kPa) Rear (kPa)  
Variant  
Tyre size  
1
Front (kPa)  
Rear (kPa)  
2.4  
2.4i  
215/55 R16 91W  
0–160  
160+  
210  
250  
220  
260  
210  
210  
220  
220  
250  
280  
250  
280  
250  
260  
250  
260  
215/50 R17 91W  
235/45 R17 94W  
235/40 R18 91Y  
0–160  
160 +  
T5  
215/55 R16 91W  
0–160  
160+  
210  
260  
220  
270  
210  
210  
220  
220  
250  
280  
250  
290  
250  
260  
250  
270  
215/50 R17 91W  
235/45 R17 94W  
235/40 R18 91 Y  
0–160  
160+  
D5  
215/55 R16 91W  
0–160  
160+  
230  
260  
240  
270  
210  
210  
220  
220  
250  
280  
250  
290  
250  
260  
250  
270  
215/50 R17 91W  
235/45 R17 94W  
235/40 R18 91 Y  
0–160  
160+  
2
2
2
2
All  
All  
0–160  
0–80  
250  
250  
420  
250  
420  
250  
420  
3
T125/85R16 99M  
420  
Spare wheel  
07  
1
In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa  
2
3
ECO pressure page 158  
Temporary Spare  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
159  
07 Wheels and tyres  
Warning triangle and spare wheel  
Warning triangle  
Spare wheel and jack  
Location, tools for emergency puncture repair kit  
Follow the regulations for the use of a warn-  
ing triangle . Place the warning triangle in a  
suitable place with regard to the traffic.  
1
The car’s original jack  
The original jack should only be used for  
changing wheels. The jack’s thread should  
always be well greased. Jack and crank are  
located in a foam block in the cargo area.  
– Undo the case containing the warning  
triangle, it is attached with Velcro. Take  
the warning triangle out of the case.  
– Lower the warning triangle’s support legs.  
Emergency puncture repair kit  
For operation and location, see page 164.  
07  
Ensure the warning triangle and its case are  
located in the spare wheel well.  
1
Certain markets.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
160  
07 Wheels and tyres  
Warning triangle and spare wheel  
Spare wheel and tools  
Spare wheel and tools  
1
The spare wheel is supplied in a tyre bag  
sure to follow the instructions on the spare  
wheel bag when it is refitted.  
that is located in the cargo area’s spare  
wheel well. In the centre of the tyre is a black  
foam block containing jack and wheel  
wrench. The tensioning strap for the bag is  
secured in two lashing eyes on the floor.  
– Undo the two tensioning straps that  
secure the tyre bag to the floor.  
07  
– Unzip the tyre bag and take out the tools.  
– Lift the spare wheel from the bag.  
Place the damaged wheel in the tyre bag and  
strap it down with the tensioning straps. Be  
1
Option on certain markets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
161  
07 Wheels and tyres  
Changing wheels  
Removing wheels  
– Cars with steel rims have removable wheel  
covers. Prize off the wheel cover with the  
end of the wheel wrench, or pull it off by  
hand.  
– Two jacking points are located on each  
side of the car. Wind down the jack’s base  
so that it sits level on the ground. Check  
that the jack is seated correctly in the  
jacking point, as illustrated, and that the  
base is located directly under it.  
Set up the warning triangle if a wheel must be  
replaced at a busy location. Make sure that  
the car and jack are on a firm horizontal sur-  
face.  
– Loosen the wheel nuts ½–1 turn anticlock-  
wise with the wheel wrench.  
– Take out the spare wheel, jack and wheel  
wrench, which are found under the carpet  
in the cargo area.  
– Jack up the car high enough that the  
wheel is clear of the ground. Remove the  
wheel nuts and lift off the wheel.  
– Apply the parking brake and engage first  
gear, or position P if the car has an auto-  
matic gearbox.  
07  
– Place chocks in front of and behind the  
wheels which will remain on the ground.  
Use heavy wooden blocks or large stones.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
162  
07 Wheels and tyres  
Changing wheels  
Fitting the wheel  
– Clean the contact surfaces on the wheel  
and hub.  
– Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel nuts.  
– Lower the car so that the wheel cannot  
rotate.  
– Tighten the wheel nuts crosswise. It is  
important that the wheel nuts are tight-  
ened properly. Tighten to 130 Nm. Check  
the torque with a torque wrench.  
– Put on the wheel cover (steel rim).  
WARNING  
Never crawl under the car when it is raised  
on the jack.  
Passengers must leave the car when it is  
raised on the jack.  
Ensure that passengers wait with the car -  
or preferably a crash barrier - between them  
and the road.  
07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
163  
07 Wheels and tyres  
Emergency puncture repair  
General  
The emergency puncture repair kit is used to  
seal the puncture and to check and adjust  
the tyre pressure. It consists of a compressor  
and a bottle with sealing fluid. The kit works  
as a temporary repair. The sealing fluid bottle  
must be replaced before its expiration date  
and after use.  
WARNING  
You must not drive faster than 80 km/h after  
the emergency tyre repair kit has been  
used. Contact an authorised Volvo work-  
shop for inspection of the sealed tyre (maxi-  
mum driving distance is 200 km). The staff  
there can determine whether or not the tyre  
can be repaired or if it needs to be replaced.  
The sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punc-  
tured in the tread.  
Location  
The emergency puncture repair kit, with  
compressor and tools, is located in the tun-  
nel for the ski compartment, see page 92.  
NOTE  
The emergency puncture repair kit is only  
intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in  
the tread.  
The emergency puncture repair kit has lim-  
ited capacity to seal tyres which have punc-  
tures in the wall. Do not seal tyres with the  
emergency puncture repair kit if they have  
larger slits, cracks or similar damage.  
12 V sockets for the compressor are located  
by the centre console in the front, by the rear  
seat and in the cargo area. Choose the elec-  
trical socket that is nearest the punctured  
tyre.  
07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
164  
07 Wheels and tyres  
Emergency puncture repair  
– The compressor must be switched off.  
Make sure that the switch is in position 0  
and locate the cable and air hose.  
Overview  
5
7
– Unscrew the wheel’s dust cap and screw  
in the air hose valve connection to the  
bottom of the thread on the tyre’s air  
valve.  
6
3
2
4
– Connect the cable to one of the car’s 12 V  
sockets and start the car.  
8
WARNING  
1
Inhaling car exhaust fumes can result in  
danger to life. Never leave the engine run-  
ning in enclosed areas or areas that lack  
sufficient ventilation.  
9
– Start the compressor by flicking the switch  
1. Decal, maximum permitted speed  
2. Switch  
to position I.  
– Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified on  
the tyre pressure decal. (Release air using  
the pressure reducing valve if the tyre  
pressure is too high.)  
3. Cable  
4. Bottle holder (orange cap)  
5. Protective cap  
6. Pressure reducing valve  
7. Air hose  
IMPORTANT  
07  
8. Sealing fluid bottle  
9. Pressure gauge  
Inflating the tyres  
The car’s original tyres can be inflated by the  
compressor.  
Risk of overheating. The compressor must  
not run for more than 10 minutes.  
– Switch off the compressor. Detach the air  
hose and cable.  
– Refit the valve’s dust cap.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
165  
07 Wheels and tyres  
Emergency puncture repair  
Sealing punctured tyres  
– Unscrew the orange cap and unscrew the  
bottle’s stopper.  
NOTE  
When the compressor starts, the pressure  
can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure  
drops after approximately 30 seconds.  
NOTE  
80  
50  
Do not break the bottle seal. The seal is bro-  
ken when the bottle is screwed in.  
– Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.  
– Screw the bottle into its holder.  
IMPORTANT  
WARNING  
Risk of overheating. The compressor must  
not run for more than 10 minutes.  
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped  
with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.  
– Switch off the compressor to check the  
pressure on the pressure gauge. Minimum  
pressure is 1.8 bar and maximum is  
3.5 bar.  
– Unscrew the wheel’s dust cap and screw  
in the air hose valve connection to the  
bottom of the thread on the tyre’s air  
valve.  
For information on the function of the parts, see  
the illustration on page 165.  
– Plug the cable into the 12 V socket and  
start the car.  
WARNING  
– Open the lid of the emergency puncture  
repair kit.  
If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the  
hole in the tyre is too big. The journey  
should not be continued. Contact an  
authorised tyre centre.  
– Flick the switch to position I.  
– Detach the decal for maximum permitted  
speed and affix it to the steering wheel.  
WARNING  
– Check that the switch is in position 0 and  
locate the cable and the air hose.  
Never stand next to the tyre when the com-  
pressor is running. If cracks or unevenness  
arise then the compressor must be  
switched off immediately. The journey  
should not be continued. Contact an  
authorised tyre centre.  
– Switch off the compressor and unplug the  
cable from the 12 V socket.  
07  
WARNING  
– Detach the hose from the tyre’s air valve  
and fit the valve’s dust cap.  
The sealing fluid can irritate the skin. In the  
case of contact with skin, wash away the  
fluid with soap and water.  
– As soon as possible, drive approximately  
3 km at a maximum speed of 80 km/h so  
that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
166  
07 Wheels and tyres  
Emergency puncture repair  
– Drive to the nearest authorised Volvo  
workshop for the replacement/repair of  
the damaged tyre. Advise the workshop  
that the tyre contains sealing fluid.  
Rechecking the repair and pressure  
– Reconnect the equipment.  
Changing the sealing fluid canister  
Replace the bottle when the expiration date  
has passed. Treat the old bottle as environ-  
mentally hazardous waste.  
– Read the tyre pressure on the pressure  
gauge.  
– If it is below 1.3 bar then the tyre is  
insufficiently sealed. The journey should  
not be continued. Contact a tyre centre.  
WARNING  
IMPORTANT  
You must not drive faster than 80 km/h after  
the emergency tyre repair kit has been  
used. Contact an authorised Volvo work-  
shop for inspection of the sealed tyre (maxi-  
mum driving distance is 200 km). The staff  
there can determine whether or not the tyre  
can be repaired or if it needs to be replaced.  
Read the safety instructions on the bottom  
of the bottle.  
– If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 bar,  
the tyre must be inflated to the pressure  
specified on the tyre pressure decal.  
Release air using the pressure reducing  
valve if the tyre pressure is too high.  
– Switch off the compressor. Detach the air  
hose and cable. Refit the valve’s dust cap.  
WARNING  
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped  
with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.  
– Return the emergency puncture repair kit  
to the cargo area.  
NOTE  
07  
The sealing fluid bottle and hose must be  
replaced after use. Replacement must be  
performed by an authorised Volvo work-  
shop.  
WARNING  
Check the tyre pressure regularly.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
167  
Cleaning ................................................................................................. 170  
Touching up paintwork ........................................................................... 173  
Rustproofing .......................................................................................... 174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
168  
CAR CARE  
08  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
08 Car care  
Cleaning  
• Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or  
a water scraper.  
of an automatic car wash cannot reach  
everywhere.  
Washing the car  
Wash the car as soon as it becomes dirty.  
Use car shampoo. Dirt and road salt can lead  
to corrosion.  
• Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm  
soap solution or car shampoo.  
WARNING  
Always test the brakes after washing the  
car, including the parking brake, to ensure  
that moisture and corrosion do not attack  
the brake linings and reduce braking per-  
formance.  
Removing bird droppings  
IMPORTANT  
Wash bird droppings off the paintwork as  
soon as possible. Bird droppings contain  
chemicals that affect and discolour paint-  
work very quickly. This discoloration can only  
be removed by a specialist.  
Avoid rinsing the car with the roof lowered,  
in order to avoid water entering the passen-  
ger compartment.  
IMPORTANT  
• Do not park the car in direct sunshine.  
Washing a car with hot paintwork can  
cause permanent paintwork damage.  
Wash the car in a car wash with waste  
water separator.  
The roof must be closed for automatic car  
washes. The antenna by the boot lid should  
be unscrewed before automatic car  
washing.  
WARNING  
Always have the engine cleaned by a work-  
shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is  
hot.  
• Thoroughly rinse dirt off the underbody of  
the car.  
IMPORTANT  
NOTE  
Washing by hand is gentler to the paintwork  
than an automatic car wash. Paintwork is  
also more sensitive when it is new. For this  
reason, handwashing is recommended  
during the first few months with a new car.  
Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog  
lamps and rear lamps may temporarily have  
condensation on the inside of the lens. This  
is a natural phenomenon, all outside lighting  
is designed to withstand this. Condensation  
is normally vented out of the lamp when it  
has been switched on for a time.  
IMPORTANT  
Rinse the entire car to remove loose dirt.  
When using a pressure washer: make sure  
that the nozzle of the pressure washer is not  
closer than 30 cm to the bodywork. Do not  
spray directly at the locks, side windows or  
their sealing strip.  
Press the brake pedal lightly from time to  
time if driving for long periods in rain or slush.  
This heats and dries the brake pads. You  
should also do this when you begin driving in  
extremely damp or cold weather.  
Automatic car washes  
• Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and  
plenty of lukewarm water.  
08  
An automatic car wash is a simple and quick  
way of washing the car, but it can never  
replace a proper handwashing. The brushes  
• If the dirt is difficult to dislodge, wash the  
car using a cold degreasing agent.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
170  
08 Car care  
Cleaning  
Exterior plastic, rubber and trim  
components  
Polishing and waxing  
Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull  
or to give the paintwork extra protection.  
Cleaning the front side windows and  
door mirrors with water-repellent  
surface (option)  
Never use products such as car wax,  
degreaser or similar on glass surfaces as this  
A special cleaning agent available from Volvo  
dealers is recommended for cleaning col-  
oured plastic parts, rubber and trim compo-  
nents (such as glossy trim mouldings). When  
using such a cleaning agent the instructions  
must be followed carefully.  
The car does not need to be polished until it  
is at least one year old. However, the car can  
be waxed during this time. Do not polish or  
wax the car in direct sunlight.  
could ruin their water-repellent properties.  
Take care when cleaning so as not to dam-  
age the glass surface.  
Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you  
begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt  
and tar stains using Volvo tar remover or  
white spirit. More stubborn stains can be  
removed using fine rubbing paste designed  
for car paintwork.  
To avoid damaging glass surfaces when  
removing ice – only use plastic ice scrapers.  
IMPORTANT  
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and  
rubber.  
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear  
away or damage the glossy surface.  
Polishing agent that contains abrasive must  
not be used.  
There is natural wear of the water-repellent  
coating.  
Treatment with a special finishing agent  
available from Volvo dealers is recom-  
mended in order to maintain the water-repel-  
lent properties. This should be used first after  
three years and then each year.  
Polish first with a polish and then wax with  
liquid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on  
the packaging carefully. Many preparations  
contain both polish and wax.  
Electrically operated roof  
If the roof is wet when opened then water will  
run into the passenger compartment. For this  
reason, wait until the water has run off before  
opening the roof.  
IMPORTANT  
Paint treatment such as preserving, sealing,  
protection, lustre sealing or similar could  
damage the paintwork. Paintwork damage  
caused by such treatment is not covered by  
Volvo warranty.  
Hatch cover  
The hatch cover (see page 80) is sensitive to  
water and should therefore be dried with a  
cloth if it becomes wet.  
08  
Clean with a slightly dampened rag.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
171  
08 Car care  
Cleaning  
ture of the leather. This is a natural maturing  
of the leather and shows that it is a natural  
product.  
– Wipe off with soft paper or a cloth and  
allow the leather to dry completely.  
Cleaning the interior  
Protective treatment of leather  
upholstery  
– Pour a small amount of the protective  
cream on the felted cloth and massage in  
a thin layer of cream with gentle circular  
movements on the leather.  
Treating stains on fabric upholstery  
A special cleaning agent, available from  
Volvo dealers, is recommended for cleaning  
the fabric upholstery. Other chemicals can  
impair the fire retardant qualities of the  
upholstery.  
To achieve best results Volvo recommends  
cleaning and application of the protective  
cream once to four times per year (or more if  
required). Ask a Volvo dealer about Volvo’s  
Leather care product.  
– Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes  
before use.  
IMPORTANT  
IMPORTANT  
The leather has now been given improved  
protection against stains and improved  
UV protection.  
Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the  
fabric upholstery.  
Never use strong solvents. Such products  
may damage fabric, vinyl and leather uphol-  
stery.  
Treating stains on leather upholstery  
Volvo leather upholstery is chromium-free  
and approved in accordance with the  
Öko-Tex 100 standard.  
Treating stains on interior plastic, metal  
and wood parts  
A special cleaning agent, available from  
Volvo dealers, is recommended for cleaning  
interior parts and surfaces. Do not scrape or  
rub stains. Never use strong stain removers.  
IMPORTANT  
Note that materials with colour that runs  
when dry (new jeans, suede garments etc.)  
may discolour the upholstery material.  
The leather is refined and processed so that  
it retains its natural characteristics. It is given  
a protective coating, but regular cleaning is  
required in order to maintain both character-  
istics and appearance. Volvo offers a com-  
prehensive product for the cleaning and  
treatment of leather upholstery which, when  
used in accordance with the instructions,  
preserves the leather’s protective coating.  
Washing instructions for leather  
upholstery  
– Pour the leather cleaner on the dampened  
sponge and squeeze out a strong foam.  
Cleaning seatbelts  
Use water and a synthetic detergent. A spe-  
cial textile cleaning agent is available from  
your Volvo dealer. Make sure the seatbelt is  
dry before allowing it to retract.  
– Work the dirt away with gentle circular  
movements.  
08  
– Dab with the sponge accurately on the  
stains. Allow the sponge to absorb the  
stain. Do not rub.  
After a period of use the natural appearance  
of the leather will nevertheless emerge,  
depending more or less on the surface tex-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
172  
08 Car care  
Touching up paintwork  
If the stone chip has penetrated to the  
bare metal  
– Stick a piece of masking tape over the  
damaged surface. Then remove the tape  
to remove any loose paint.  
Paintwork  
Stone chips and scratches  
Paint is an important part of the car’s rust-  
proofing and should therefore be checked  
regularly. To avoid the onset of rust, dam-  
aged paintwork must be rectified immedi-  
ately. The most common types of paintwork  
damage are stone chips, scratches, and  
marks on the edges of wings and doors.  
– Stir the primer well and apply using a fine  
brush or matchstick. Apply paint using a  
brush once the primer is dry.  
– For scratches, proceed as above, but  
mask around the damaged area to protect  
the undamaged paintwork.  
Colour code  
– After a few days, polish the touched-up  
areas. Use a soft rag and a small amount  
of lapping paste.  
Before touching up paintwork, the car must  
be clean and dry and at a temperature  
above 15 C.  
1
Materials  
• Primer in a can  
Data plate  
• Paint in a can or touch-up pen  
• Brush  
It is important that the correct colour is used.  
The colour code number (1) is shown on the  
data plate, see page 232.  
• Masking tape  
Minor stone chips and scratches  
If the stone chip has not penetrated to the  
bare metal and there is an undamaged colour  
coat, you can paint straight after cleaning the  
damaged area.  
08  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
173  
08 Car care  
Rustproofing  
Inspection and maintenance  
Your car received a thorough and complete  
rustproofing at the factory. Parts of the body  
are made of galvanised sheet metal. The  
underbody is protected by a wear-resistant  
anti-corrosion compound. And, a thin, pene-  
trating rustproofing fluid was sprayed into the  
members, cavities and closed sections.  
Maintain the car’s rustproofing.  
• Keep the car clean. Hose down the under-  
body. If using a pressure washer, keep the  
nozzle at least 30 cm from the painted  
surfaces.  
• Regularly check and touch-up the rust-  
proofing treatment as necessary.  
The car’s rustproofing does not normally  
require treatment for approximately 12 years.  
After that time, it should be treated at three-  
year intervals. If the car needs further treat-  
ment, please contact an authorised Volvo  
workshop.  
08  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
174  
08 Car care  
08  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
175  
Volvo service .......................................................................................... 178  
Self-maintenance ................................................................................... 179  
Bonnet and engine compartment .......................................................... 180  
Diesel ..................................................................................................... 181  
Oils and fluids ........................................................................................ 182  
Wiper blades .......................................................................................... 187  
Battery .................................................................................................... 188  
Replacing bulbs ..................................................................................... 190  
Fuses ...................................................................................................... 196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
176  
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE  
09  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Volvo service  
Corporation will not disclose the stored infor-  
mation without consent. However, Volvo Car  
Corporation may be forced to disclose the  
information due to national legislation. Volvo  
Car Corporation and authorised Volvo work-  
shops may also read and use the informa-  
tion.  
Volvo service programme  
Installing accessories  
The incorrect connection and installation of  
accessories can negatively affect the car’s  
electrical system. Certain accessories only  
function when the appropriate software has  
been programmed into the car’s electrical  
system. Always contact an authorised Volvo  
workshop before installing accessories  
which are connected to or affect the electri-  
cal system.  
Before the car left the factory, it was thor-  
oughly test driven. It was checked again in  
accordance with Volvo Car Corporation reg-  
ulations before it was handed over to you.  
To keep your Volvo as safe and reliable as  
possible, follow the Volvo service pro-  
gramme specified in the Service and War-  
ranty Booklet. Have an authorised Volvo  
workshop carry out service and maintenance  
work. Volvo workshops have the personnel,  
special tools and service literature to guaran-  
tee the highest quality of service.  
Adverse driving conditions  
Check the oil level more frequently for long  
journeys:  
Recording vehicle data  
• Towing a caravan or trailer  
• In mountainous regions  
• At high speeds  
One or more of the computers in your Volvo  
are capable of recording detailed informa-  
tion. This information is intended for use in  
research to enhance safety and for diagnos-  
ing faults in some of the in-car systems. The  
data may include details regarding seatbelt  
use by the driver and passengers, the func-  
tions of various vehicle systems and mod-  
ules, and status information about the  
engine, throttle, steering, brakes and other  
systems. This data can also include details of  
the way the car is driven. This type of infor-  
mation can include, without being limited to,  
specific details such as vehicle speed, the  
use of the brake and accelerator pedals and  
steering wheel position. This latter type of  
data can be stored for a limited period while  
the car is being driven and subsequently dur-  
ing a collision or a near-collision. Volvo Car  
• In temperatures colder than –30 C or hot-  
ter than +40 C.  
IMPORTANT  
For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and  
follow the instructions in the Service and  
Warranty Booklet.  
Also check the oil level more often if the car  
is often driven short distances (less than  
10 km) when temperatures are low  
(below +5 C).  
Special service measures  
This can produce abnormally high oil temper-  
ature or oil consumption.  
Certain service measures, which affect the  
car’s electrical system, can only be per-  
formed using electronic equipment specially  
developed for your car. Always contact an  
authorised Volvo workshop before beginning  
or performing service work that affects the  
electrical system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
178  
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Self-maintenance  
Before starting work on the car  
Check regularly  
Check the following at regular intervals, for  
example, when refuelling:  
Battery  
Check that the battery cables are correctly  
connected and tightened.  
• Coolant – The level must be between the  
MIN and MAX marks on the expansion  
tank.  
Never disconnect the battery when the  
engine is running (e.g. if replacing the bat-  
tery).  
• Engine oil – The level must be between the  
MIN and MAX marks.  
• Power steering fluid – The level must be  
Never use a quick charger to charge the bat-  
tery. The battery cables must be discon-  
nected when charging the battery.  
between the MIN and MAX marks.  
• Washer fluid – The reservoir should be well  
filled. Use washer antifreeze at tempera-  
tures around freezing.  
The battery contains acid that is both corro-  
sive and toxic. Handle the battery in an envi-  
ronmentally-suitable way. Let your Volvo  
dealer assist you.  
• Brake and clutch fluid – The level must be  
between the MIN and MAX marks.  
WARNING  
WARNING  
Bear in mind that the radiator fan may start  
automatically some time after the engine  
has been switched off.  
Always have the engine cleaned by a work-  
shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is  
hot.  
High voltage output from the ignition sys-  
tem. The voltage in the ignition system is  
dangerous. The ignition must therefore  
always be switched off for work in the  
engine compartment.  
Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition  
coils when the ignition is on or the engine is  
hot.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
179  
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Bonnet and engine compartment  
Opening the bonnet  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
1
– Pull the handle on the far left under the  
dashboard. You will hear when the catch  
releases.  
9. Filler opening for engine oil  
Engine compartment  
1. Washer fluid reservoir (4-cyl.)  
2. Coolant expansion tank  
10.Brake and clutch fluid reservoir  
(left-hand drive)  
– Insert your hand under the centre of the  
front edge of the bonnet and press the  
safety catch to the right.  
11.Battery  
3. Reservoir for the power steering fluid  
(concealed behind the headlamp)  
12.Relay and fuse box  
1
1
13.Air filter  
4. Engine oil dipstick  
– Open the bonnet.  
5. Radiator  
WARNING  
6. Radiator fan  
7. Washer fluid reservoir (5-cyl.)  
Check that the bonnet locks properly when  
closed.  
8. Brake and clutch fluid reservoir  
(right-hand drive)  
1
Dependent on engine variant.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
180  
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Diesel  
Fuel system  
Draining condensation from the fuel  
filter  
The fuel filter separates condensation from  
the fuel. Condensation can disrupt engine  
operation.  
Diesel must fulfil the EN 590 or JIS K2204  
standards. Diesel engines are sensitive to  
contaminants, such as high volumes of sul-  
phur particles for example. Only use diesel  
fuels from well-known producers. Never use  
diesel of dubious quality.  
IMPORTANT  
Diesel type fuels which must not be used:  
special additives, Marine Diesel Fuel, fuel  
1
oil, RME (Rape Methyl Ester) and vegeta-  
The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals  
specified in the Service and Warranty Book-  
let or if you suspect that the car has been  
filled with contaminated fuel.  
ble oil. These fuels do not fulfil the require-  
ments in accordance with Volvo  
At low temperatures (–40 C to –6 C), a  
paraffin precipitate may form in the diesel  
fuel, which can lead to ignition problems.  
Special diesel fuel designed for low tempera-  
tures around freezing point is available from  
the major oil companies. This fuel is less vis-  
cous at low temperatures and reduces the  
risk of paraffin precipitate.  
recommendations and generate increased  
wear and engine damage not covered by  
the Volvo warranty.  
IMPORTANT  
1
Diesel fuel may contain a certain amount of  
RME, but further amounts must not be added.  
Certain special additives remove the water  
separation in the fuel filter.  
IMPORTANT  
For model year 2006 or later the sulphur  
content must be a maximum of 50 ppm.  
The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is  
reduced if the tank is kept well filled. When  
refuelling, check that the area around the fuel  
filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the  
paintwork. Wash off any spillage with deter-  
gent and water.  
Empty tank  
No special procedures are required if the  
tank runs dry. The fuel system is bled auto-  
matically if the ignition switch is kept in  
position II for approx. 60 seconds before the  
start attempt.  
IMPORTANT  
Only ever use fuel that fulfils the European  
diesel standard, see page 243.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
181  
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Oils and fluids  
Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.  
Change the oil and replace the oil filter in  
accordance with the intervals specified in the  
Service and Warranty Booklet.  
Engine compartment decal for oil  
grade  
Checking the engine oil and oil filter  
Engine oil quality: XXX  
Viscosity: XXX  
IMPORTANT  
In order to fulfil the requirements for the en-  
gine’s service intervals all engines are filled  
with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil  
at the factory. The choice of oil has been  
made very carefully with regard to service  
life, starting characteristics, fuel consump-  
tion and environmental impact.  
An approved engine oil must be used in  
order that the recommended service inter-  
vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed  
grade of oil (see the engine compartment  
decal) for both filling and oil change, other-  
wise you will risk affecting service life, start-  
ing characteristics, fuel consumption and  
environmental impact.  
Dipstick, petrol engines  
IMPORTANT  
Always use oil of the prescribed grade, see  
the engine compartment decal. Check the  
oil level frequently and change the oil regu-  
larly. The engine will be damaged if lower  
grade oil is used or if the car is driven with  
the oil level too low.  
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all warran-  
ty liability if engine oil of the prescribed  
grade and viscosity is not used.  
Volvo uses different systems for warning of  
low oil level or low oil pressure. Certain vari-  
ants have an oil pressure sensor, and then  
the lamp for oil pressure is used. Other vari-  
ants have an oil level sensor, and then the  
driver is informed via the warning symbol in  
the centre of the instrument unit as well as by  
Using oil of a higher than specified grade is  
permitted. If the car is driven in adverse con-  
ditions, Volvo recommends using an oil of a  
higher grade than that specified on the decal.  
See page 237.  
Dipstick, diesel engines  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
182  
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Oils and fluids  
display texts. Certain models have both vari-  
ants. Contact an authorised Volvo dealer for  
more information.  
Checking the oil in a warm engine:  
– Park the car on a level surface, switch off  
the engine and wait 10–15 minutes to  
allow the oil time to run back to the sump.  
Checking the oil  
Checking the oil level in a new car is espe-  
cially important before the first scheduled oil  
change. The Service and Warranty Booklet  
specifies the odometer readings for oil  
changes.  
– Wipe the dipstick clean before checking  
the level.  
– Check the oil level using the dipstick. The  
oil level must be between the MIN and  
MAX marks.  
Volvo recommends checking the oil level  
every 2 500 km. The most accurate measure-  
ments are made on a cold engine before  
starting. The measurement will be inaccurate  
if taken immediately after the engine is  
switched off. The dipstick will indicate that  
the level is too low because the oil has not  
had time to flow down into the oil sump.  
If the level is close to the MIN mark, start by  
topping up with 0.5 litres of oil. Top up until  
the oil level is nearer the MAX than the MIN  
mark on the dipstick. See page 237–238 for  
capacities.  
The oil level must be within the area marked on  
the dipstick.  
WARNING  
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust mani-  
fold due to the risk of fire.  
Checking the oil in a cold engine:  
– Wipe the dipstick clean before checking  
the level.  
IMPORTANT  
– Check the oil level using the dipstick. The  
oil level must be between the MIN and  
MAX marks.  
Never fill above the MAX mark. Oil con-  
sumption may increase if too much oil is  
poured into the engine.  
– If the level is close to the MIN mark, start  
by topping up with 0.5 litres of oil. Top up  
until the oil level is nearer the MAX than  
the MIN mark on the dipstick. See  
page 237–238 for capacities.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
183  
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Oils and fluids  
Washer fluid, topping up  
Checking and topping up the coolant  
NOTE  
Mix the washer antifreeze and water before  
filling the reservoir.  
1
TIP! Clean the wiper blades when topping up  
washer fluid.  
2
1
Location of washer fluid reservoir .  
When topping up the coolant, follow the  
instructions on the packaging. It is important  
that the mixture of coolant concentrate and  
water is correct for the prevailing weather  
conditions. Never top up with water only. The  
risk of freezing increases with both too little  
and too much coolant concentrate.  
The windscreen and headlamp washers  
share a common reservoir.  
1. Filler cap on 4-cylinder engines and die-  
sel.  
2. Filler cap on 5-cylinder engines.  
Add washer antifreeze during the winter so  
that the fluid does not freeze in the pump,  
reservoir and hoses. See the capacities on  
page 241.  
IMPORTANT  
Always use coolant with anti-corrosion  
agent as recommended by Volvo. New cars  
are filled with coolant that can withstand  
temperatures down to approximately  
–35 C.  
1
See capacities on page 241.  
Dependent on engine variant.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
184  
09 Maintenance and service  
Oils and fluids  
09  
Check the coolant regularly  
Checking and topping up the brake  
and clutch fluid  
WARNING  
The level should lie between the MIN and  
MAX marks on the expansion tank. If the  
system is not filled sufficiently, high local  
temperatures could occur, causing a risk of  
damage (cracks) in the cylinder head. Top up  
the coolant when the level falls to the MIN  
mark.  
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in  
the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further  
before topping up the brake fluid.  
The reason for the loss of brake fluid must  
be investigated.  
WARNING  
The coolant may be very hot. If the coolant  
requires topping up when the engine is at  
operating temperature, unscrew the expan-  
sion tank cap slowly to gently release the  
overpressure.  
NOTE  
The brake and clutch fluid have a common  
reservoir . The fluid level must be between  
the MIN and MAX marks. Check the level  
regularly. Change the brake fluid every other  
year or at every other regular service.  
1
The engine must only be run with a well-  
filled cooling system. High temperatures  
can occur, causing a risk of damage  
(cracks) to the cylinder head.  
See the capacities and recommended fluid  
grade on page 241.  
The fluid should be changed annually on cars  
driven in conditions requiring hard, frequent  
braking, such as driving in mountains or trop-  
ical climates with high humidity.  
1
Location dependent on whether car is left or  
right-hand drive.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
185  
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Oils and fluids  
Checking and topping up the power  
steering fluid  
NOTE  
Check the level frequently.  
The fluid does not require changing. For  
capacities and recommended fluid grade,  
see page 241.  
If a fault should arise in the power steering  
system or if the car is without power and  
must be towed, it can still be steered. How-  
ever the steering will be much heavier than  
normal and it will require more effort to turn  
the wheel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
186  
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Wiper blades  
Changing the wiper blades  
1
2
NOTE  
The wiper blades are different lengths. The  
blade on the driver’s side is longer than the  
blade on the passenger side.  
3
– Turn up the wiper arm.  
– Press the button located on the wiper  
blade mounting and pull straight out (1),  
parallel with the wiper arm.  
– Slide in (2) the new wiper blade until a  
"click" is heard.  
– Check (3) that the blade is firmly installed.  
– Fold down the wiper arm.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
187  
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Battery  
Risk of explosion.  
Battery care  
Symbols on the battery  
Use protective goggles.  
The service life and function of the battery is  
influenced by factors such as the number of  
starts, discharging, driving style, driving con-  
ditions and climatic conditions.  
NOTE  
Further information in the  
owner’s manual.  
An expended battery must be recycled in an  
environmentally responsible manner as it  
contains lead.  
Store the battery out of the  
reach of children.  
WARNING  
Batteries can generate oxyhydrogen gas,  
which is highly explosive. A spark, which  
can be generated if you connect the jump  
leads incorrectly, is sufficient to make the  
battery explode. The battery also contains  
sulphuric acid, which can cause serious  
burns. If the acid comes into contact with  
eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quan-  
tities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes,  
seek medical advice immediately.  
The battery contains corro-  
sive acid.  
Avoid sparks and naked  
flames.  
NOTE  
The life of the battery is shortened if it  
becomes discharged repeatedly.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
188  
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Battery  
Changing the battery  
Removing the battery  
– Switch off the ignition and remove the key.  
– Wait at least 5 minutes before touching  
any electrical terminals. This allows time  
for the information in the car’s electrical  
system to be stored in the various control  
modules.  
– Remove the cover.  
– Disconnect the negative battery lead.  
– Disconnect the positive battery lead.  
– Undo the front wall of the battery box  
using a screwdriver.  
– Release the clamp securing the battery.  
– Remove the battery.  
Fitting the battery  
– Fit the battery into position.  
– Fit the clamp securing the battery.  
– Reinstall the front wall of the battery box.  
– Connect the positive lead.  
– Connect the negative lead.  
– Refit the cover over the battery.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
189  
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Replacing bulbs  
General  
Changing front bulbs  
All bulb specifications are given on page 246.  
3
1
The following list contains bulbs and point-  
source lamps that are specialised or unsuita-  
ble for changing except at a workshop:  
4
• General interior lighting in the roof  
• Reading lamps and glovebox lighting  
• Direction indicators, door mirror and  
approach lighting  
• High-level brake light  
• Bi-Xenon headlamp  
2
WARNING  
– Unplug the connector by pressing down  
the clip with a thumb (3) while moving out  
the connector (4) with the other hand.  
On cars with Bi-Xenon headlamps, Xenon  
lamp replacement must be carried out by an  
authorised Volvo workshop. The headlamps  
must be handled with extreme care due to  
the high-voltage unit in the Xenon lamp.  
All front bulbs (except for fog lamps) are  
changed by first removing the lamp housing  
from the engine compartment.  
– Lift out the lamp housing and place it on a  
soft surface to avoid scratching the lens.  
Removing the lamp housing:  
– Remove the ignition key and turn the light  
switch to position 0.  
Fitting the lamp housing:  
– Plug in the connector and refit the lamp  
housing and locking pin. Check that the  
pin is correctly inserted.  
IMPORTANT  
– Withdraw the lamp housing’s locking  
pin (1).  
Never touch the bulbs’ glass with your fin-  
gers. Grease and oils from your fingers are  
vaporised by the heat, coating and damag-  
ing the reflector.  
– Check the lighting.  
– Pull the lamp housing to the side and then  
forward (2).  
The lamp housing must be plugged in and  
secured in place before the lighting is turned  
on or the ignition key inserted into the ignition  
switch.  
IMPORTANT  
Do not pull the electrical cable, only the  
connector.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
190  
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Replacing bulbs  
Main beam  
Dipped beam  
– Remove the entire lamp housing.  
Removing the cover and bulb:  
– Remove the entire lamp housing.  
– Bend aside the catches and remove the  
cover.  
Fitting a new bulb  
– Fit the new bulb. It can only be fitted in  
one position.  
– Left-hand headlamp:  
Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise.  
Right-hand headlamp:  
– Press the spring clip up and then slightly  
to the right so that it clicks into place.  
Turn the bulb holder clockwise.  
– Unplug the connector from the bulb.  
– Withdraw the bulb holder and change the  
bulb.  
– Press the connector back on.  
– Refit the plastic cover.  
– Release the spring clip that secures the  
bulb. First, press it to the left to release it,  
then out and down.  
– Refit the bulb holder. It can only be fitted  
in one way.  
– Refit the lamp housing.  
– Pull out the bulb.  
– Refit the lamp housing.  
– Refit the lamp housing.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
191  
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Replacing bulbs  
Position/parking lamps  
Direction indicators  
Side marker lamps  
– Pull out the bulb holder with a pair of  
pliers. Do not pull out the bulb holder by  
pulling the electrical cable.  
– Twist the bulb holder anticlockwise and  
remove it.  
– Twist the bulb holder anticlockwise and  
withdraw it. Replace the bulb.  
– To remove the bulb from the bulb holder,  
press the bulb in and turn it anticlockwise.  
– Refit the bulb holder. It can only be fitted  
in one way.  
– Replace the bulb.  
– Press the bulb holder back into place. It  
can only be fitted in one way.  
– Fit a new bulb and refit the bulb holder into  
the lamp housing.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
192  
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Replacing bulbs  
Fog lamps  
Removing the bulb holder  
Location of the bulbs in the rear lamp  
cluster  
1
2
3
5
4
– Switch off all lights and turn the ignition  
All bulbs in the rear lamp cluster can be  
replaced from inside the cargo area. Switch  
off all lights and turn the ignition key to  
position 0.  
Bulb holder  
key to position 0.  
1. Brake light  
– Remove the panel from around the lamp  
housing.  
2. Position/parking lamps  
3. Rear fog lamp (one side)  
– Remove the two Torx screws securing the  
lamp housing and take out the lamp hous-  
ing.  
NOTE  
If the error message BULB FAILURE/  
CHECK STOP LAMP remains after a faulty  
bulb has been replaced then consult an  
authorised Volvo workshop.  
NOTE  
– Unplug the connector from the bulb.  
– Turn the bulb anticlockwise and pull it out.  
– Fit the new bulb and turn it clockwise.  
– Plug in the connector to the bulb.  
The rear fog lamp bulb is only used in one of  
the rear light clusters. In the left-hand rear  
light cluster on left-hand drive cars, and in  
the right-hand rear light cluster on right-  
hand drive cars.  
– Secure the lamp housing with the screws  
and press the panel back into place.  
4. Direction indicators  
5. Reversing lamp  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
193  
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Replacing bulbs  
Number plate lighting  
Courtesy lighting  
Cargo area  
– Switch off all lights and turn the ignition  
key to position 0.  
– There is courtesy lighting under the dash-  
board on the driver and passenger sides.  
– Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so that  
the lamp housing comes loose.  
– Remove the screws with a screwdriver.  
– Detach the lens carefully.  
– Replace the bulb.  
– Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so that  
the lens detaches.  
– Remove the blown bulb and fit a new one.  
– Remove the blown bulb.  
– Fit a new bulb.  
– Refit and screw in the lens.  
– Refit the lens.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
194  
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Replacing bulbs  
Fitting the mirror glass:  
– First, press the three lugs at top edge of  
mirror glass back into position.  
Vanity mirror lighting  
Interior lighting, rear  
– Then press the three lower lugs back into  
position.  
– Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so that  
the lamp housing comes loose.  
Removing the mirror glass:  
– Insert a screwdriver underneath the lower  
edge, in the centre. Carefully prise up the  
lug on the edge.  
– Remove the blown bulb and fit a new one.  
– Insert the screwdriver under the edge on  
both the left and right side (at the black  
rubber points) and carefully prise so that  
the lens releases at the lower edge.  
– Carefully detach and lift aside the entire  
mirror glass and cover.  
– Remove the blown bulb and replace it with  
a new one.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
195  
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Fuses  
General  
Changing  
If an electrical component or function does  
not work, it may be because the compo-  
nent’s fuse was temporarily overloaded and  
blew.  
All electrical functions and components are  
fused to protect the car’s electrical system  
from damage by short circuiting and over-  
loading.  
– Look in the fuse diagram to locate the  
fuse.  
The fuses are in two different locations in the  
car:  
– Pull out the fuse and check from the side  
to see whether the curved wire has blown.  
• Relay/fuse box in the engine compartment  
• Relay/fuse box in the passenger  
compartment.  
– If this is the case, replace it with a new  
fuse of the same colour and amperage.  
Each fuse box has space for several spare  
fuses. If the same fuse blows repeatedly it  
means that there is a fault in the component.  
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop to  
have the system checked.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
196  
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Fuses  
Relay/fuse box in the engine compartment  
The fuse box has 36 fuse positions. Be sure  
to replace a blown fuse with a new fuse of  
the same colour and amperage.  
• 19—36 are of the "Mini Fuse" type.  
• Fuses 7—18 are of the "JCASE" type and  
should be replaced by an authorised Volvo  
workshop.  
• Fuses 1—6 are of the "Midi Fuse" type  
and may only be replaced by an author-  
ised Volvo workshop.  
On the inside of the cover are tweezers to  
assist removing and fitting fuses.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
197  
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Fuses  
1. Radiator fan .............................................................................. 50 A  
2. Power steering ..................................................................80 A  
3. Supply to passenger compartment fuse box ......................60 A  
4. Supply to passenger compartment fuse box ......................60 A  
5. Climate control element, additional heater PTC (option)..... 80 A  
6. Glow plugs (diesel) ............................................................ 70 A  
7. ABS pump ......................................................................... 30 A  
8. ABS valves ........................................................................20 A  
9. Engine functions................................................................30 A  
10.Ventilation fan....................................................................40 A  
13.Starter motor relay ............................................................ 30 A  
14.Trailer wiring ..................................................................... 40 A  
15.Power roof ........................................................................ 30 A  
16.Supply to infotainment system .......................................... 30 A  
17.Windscreen wipers............................................................ 30 A  
18.Supply to passenger compartment fuse box ..................... 40 A  
19.Reserve .................................................................................. -  
20.Horn ................................................................................. 15 A  
21.Fuel-driven additional heater,  
passenger compartment heater ........................................ 20 A  
22.Subwoofer ........................................................................ 25 A  
11.Headlamp washers, power roof,  
lockable storage compartment and ski hatch.....................20 A  
23.Engine control module ECM (5-cyl. petrol)/  
Transmission control module (TCM) .................................. 10 A  
12.Supply to heated rear window ...........................................30 A  
24.Heated fuel filter, PTC element oil trap (diesel) .................. 20 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
198  
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Fuses  
25.Reserve ...................................................................................-  
26.Ignition switch ...................................................................15 A  
27.A/C compressor ................................................................10 A  
28.Reserve ...................................................................................-  
29.Front fog lamp ...................................................................15 A  
30.Engine control module ECM (4-cyl. diesel) ...........................3 A  
31.Reserve ...................................................................................-  
32.Injectors (petrol), mass air flow sensor and turbo  
control (diesel)...................................................................10 A  
33.Lambda-sond, vacuum pump (petrol),  
engine control module ECM (diesel)...................................20 A  
34.Pressure switch, climate control system,  
ignition coils (petrol), glow plugs and  
EGR emission control (diesel) ............................................10 A  
35.Engine sensors for valves, relay coil,  
air conditioning PTC element, oil trap (petrol),  
engine control module ECM (diesel), canister (petrol),  
MAF mass air flow sensor (petrol) ...................................... 15 A  
36.Engine control module ECM (not diesel),  
accelerator pedal position sensor,  
lambda-sond (diesel) .........................................................10 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
199  
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Fuses  
Relay/fuse box in the passenger  
compartment  
1
2
3
The fuse box has 50 fuse positions. The  
fuses are located under the glovebox. The  
box also provides space for several spare  
fuses. Tools for fuse replacement are located  
in the relay/fuse box in the engine compart-  
ment, see page 197.  
completely. The fuse box can be  
unhooked.  
– Close the fuse box in the reverse order.  
– Remove the pins from the centre of the  
clips. Fit the trim and the clips, and rein-  
sert the loose pins into the clips, this  
expands the clips and secures the trim.  
Changing fuses  
– Remove the trim concealing the fuse box  
by pressing in the pin in the centre of the  
clips (1) about one cm and then withdraw-  
ing the clips.  
– Turn the two wing screws (that secure the  
fuse box) (2) anticlockwise so that they  
detach.  
– Lower the fuse box (3) half way. Pull it  
towards the seat until it stops. Lower it  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
200  
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Fuses  
37.Reserve ...................................................................................-  
38.Reserve ...................................................................................-  
39.Reserve ...................................................................................-  
40.Reserve ...................................................................................-  
41.Reserve ...................................................................................-  
42.Reserve ...................................................................................-  
43.Phone, audio system, RTI (option) .....................................15 A  
44.SRS system, engine control module ECM (5-cyl.)...............10 A  
45.Electrical socket, passenger compartment ........................15 A  
46.Passenger compartment, glovebox and courtesy lighting ....5 A  
47.Interior lighting ....................................................................5 A  
48.Washer ..............................................................................15 A  
49.SRS system ...................................................................... 10 A  
50.Reserve .................................................................................. -  
51.Additional heater for the passenger compartment,  
fuel filter relay, heating ...................................................... 10 A  
52.Transmission control module (TCM), ABS system ............... 5 A  
53.Power steering.................................................................. 10 A  
54.Parking assistance, Bi-Xenon (option) ............................... 10 A  
55. Keyless drive control module ........................................... 20 A  
56.Remote control module, siren control module ................... 10 A  
57.Data link connector (DLC), brake light switch .................... 15 A  
58.Main beam right, auxiliary lamps relay coil ....................... 7,5 A  
59.Main beam, left ................................................................ 7,5 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
201  
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Fuses  
60.Seat heating (driver’s side).................................................15 A  
61.Seat heating (passenger side) ............................................15 A  
62.Reserve .................................................................................. -  
63.Supply, power window, right rear....................................... 20 A  
64.Lamp for door lock, RTI .......................................................5 A  
65.Infotainment system ............................................................5 A  
66.Infotainment control module (ICM), climate control ............10 A  
67.Reserve ...................................................................................-  
68.Cruise control......................................................................5 A  
69.Climate control, rain sensor, BLIS button.............................5 A  
70.Reserve ...................................................................................-  
71.Reserve ...................................................................................-  
72.Reserve ...................................................................................-  
84.Power passenger seat....................................................... 25 A  
85.Power driver’s seat ........................................................... 25 A  
86.Interior lighting, cargo area lighting, power seats ................ 5 A  
73.Overhead console for interior lighting (OHC),  
rear seatbelt reminder .........................................................5 A  
74.Fuel pump relay .................................................................15 A  
75.Reserve ...................................................................................-  
76.Reserve ...................................................................................-  
77.Electrical socket in cargo area,  
accessory electronic module (AEM) ...................................15 A  
78.Reserve ...................................................................................-  
79.Reversing lamp....................................................................5 A  
80.Reserve ...................................................................................-  
81.Supply, power window, left rear.........................................20 A  
82.Supply, power window and door, right front.......................25 A  
83.Supply, power window and door, left front.........................25 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
202  
09 Maintenance and service  
09  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
203  
General ...................................................................................................206  
Audio functions ......................................................................................207  
Radio functions ...................................................................................... 211  
CD functions .......................................................................................... 215  
Menu structure – audio system .............................................................. 217  
Phone functions (option) ........................................................................ 218  
Menu structure – phone .........................................................................225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
204  
INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10 Infotainment system  
General  
ues to be active until the key is removed from  
the ignition switch. The audio system is then  
started automatically the next time the key is  
turned to position I.  
Infotainment system  
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II  
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II distributes the  
two stereo audio channels to left, centre,  
right and rear speakers. This provides a more  
realistic sound quality than that provided by  
standard two-channel stereo.  
2
10  
2
3
Menus  
Some infotainment system functions are  
controlled via a menu system. The current  
menu level is shown at the top right of the  
display. Menu options are shown in the mid-  
dle of the display.  
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II and  
the Dolby icon are trademarks of  
Dolby Laboratories Licensing  
Corporation.  
1
4
6
5
7
MENU (4) leads to the menu system.  
The Dolby Surround Pro Logic II System is  
manufactured under license from Dolby  
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.  
• Up/down with the navigation button (5)  
moves between menu options.  
ENTER (7) selects or activates/deacti-  
vates a menu option.  
Infotainment is a system that integrates the  
audio system and the phone . The infotain-  
1
EXIT (6) goes back one step in the menu  
structure. A long press on EXIT will exit  
the menu system.  
ment system can be easily operated using  
the control panel or the steering wheel key-  
1
pad , see page 53. The display (2) shows  
Shortcuts  
Menu options are numbered and can also be  
selected directly with the keypad (3).  
messages and information on the current  
function.  
Audio system  
Equipment  
The audio system can be equipped with dif-  
ferent options and different versions. There  
are three audio system versions: Perform-  
ance, High Performance and Premium  
Sound. FM and AM radio with RDS and CD  
player is however included in each version.  
On/Off  
POWER (1) switches the audio system on or  
off. If the audio system is active when the  
ignition key is turned to position 0 it contin-  
1
2
Option  
Premium Sound  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
206  
10 Infotainment system  
Audio functions  
Sometimes the AUX external audio source  
can be heard at a different volume to the  
internal audio sources, e.g. the CD player. If  
the audio volume of the external audio  
source is too high then the sound quality can  
be impaired. Prevent this by adjusting the  
input volume of the AUX input.  
Audio controls  
Audio source selection  
Repeatedly pressing AM/FM switches  
between FM1, FM2 and AM. Repeatedly  
pressing MODE switches between CD and  
AUX.  
10  
1
2
3
4
5
6
AUX  
The AUX input can be used for connecting an  
MP3 player for example.  
– Set the audio system in AUX mode using  
MODE.  
– Press MENU and then ENTER.  
– Scroll to AUX input Volume and press  
ENTER.  
– Turn TUNING or press right/left on the  
navigation button.  
1. VOLUME – Knob  
2. AM/FM – Audio source selection  
3. MODE – Audio source selection,  
CD/AUX  
4. TUNING – Knob  
5. SOUND – Button  
Input for external audio source (AUX) 3.5 mm  
Volume  
Use VOLUME (1) or the steering wheel key-  
pad to regulate the volume, see page 53.  
Audio volume adjusts automatically  
NOTE  
The sound quality may be impaired if the  
player is charged while the audio system is  
in AUX mode, so avoid charging the player.  
depending on vehicle speed, see page 209.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
207  
10 Infotainment system  
Audio functions  
1
When the indexing is finished the track infor-  
mation is shown on the display and it is pos-  
sible to select the track required.  
the system it must be set in the USB Remov-  
able Device/Mass Storage Device mode.  
USB/iPod contact  
It is possible to connect an iPod and/or USB  
memory for example to the car’s infotain-  
ment system via the contact in the centre  
console.  
10  
iPod player  
Track selection can take place in two ways:  
The iPod player is charged and powered by  
the system via the connecting cable. How-  
ever, if the iPod’s battery is completely dis-  
charged then it must be charged before the  
iPod player is connected.  
• Turn TUNING (4) clockwise or anticlock-  
wise  
• or use the navigation control’s (6) right or  
left-hand button to scroll to the required  
track.  
NOTE  
If the car is equipped with a steering wheel  
keypad then it is also possible to change  
tracks using these controls.  
When an iPod is used as an audio source,  
the car’s infotainment system has a menu  
structure similar to the menu structure of  
the iPod player. See the iPod manual for  
detailed information.  
NOTE  
The system supports the playback of music  
files in the most common variants of the  
MP3, WMA and WAV file formats. There are  
also variants of these audio formats that are  
not supported by the system.  
For further information, see the accessory  
manual for USB/iPod Music Interface.  
Audio settings  
The audio source needs to be selected  
depending on what is connected:  
Adjusting audio settings  
USB memory  
Repeatedly pressing SOUND browses  
between the following alternatives. Adjust by  
turning TUNING.  
– Select iPod or USB using MODE. The text  
Connect Device is shown on the display.  
To facilitate the use of USB memory, avoid  
storing any files other than music files in the  
memory. It takes considerably longer for the  
system to index storage media that contains  
items other than compatible music files.  
– Connect the storage media to the contact  
in the centre console’s storage compart-  
ment (see illustration above).  
BASS – Bass level.  
TREBLE – Treble level.  
The text Loading is shown in the display  
when the system indexes the files on the  
storage media. This takes a while.  
MP3 player  
FADER – Balance between the front and  
rear speakers.  
Many MP3 players have their own file sys-  
tems that are not supported by the audio  
system. To be able to use an MP3 player in  
BALANCE – Balance between the left and  
right-hand speakers.  
1
Option  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
208  
10 Infotainment system  
Audio functions  
SUBWOOFER 1 Bass speaker level. The  
subwoofer must be activated before  
adjustment is possible. See page 209.  
Activating/deactivating surround sound  
– Press MENU and then ENTER.  
Automatic volume control  
The auto volume control function allows the  
audio volume to increase as the speed of the  
car increases. There are three levels to  
10  
– Scroll to Audio settings and press  
ENTER.  
2
CENTRE – Centre speaker level. Three  
channel stereo or Pro Logic II must be  
activated before adjustment is possible.  
See page 209.  
5
choose from : Low, Medium and High.  
– Scroll to Surround FM/AM/CD/AUX and  
press ENTER.  
3
Adjusting automatic volume control  
– Press MENU and then ENTER.  
– Scroll to Pro Logic II , 3 channel or Off  
and press ENTER.  
2
SURROUND – Surround sound level.  
Pro Logic II must be activated before  
adjustment is possible. See page 209.  
– Scroll to Audio settings and press  
ENTER.  
Equalizer front/rear  
4
The equalizer can be used to adjust different  
– Scroll to Automatic volume control and  
press ENTER.  
Activating/deactivating the subwoofer  
– Press MENU and then ENTER.  
frequency bands separately.  
– Scroll to Low, Medium or High and press  
ENTER.  
Adjusting equalizer  
– Press MENU and then ENTER.  
– Scroll to Audio settings and press  
ENTER.  
– Scroll to Subwoofer and press ENTER.  
– Scroll to Audio settings and press  
Automatic audio settings  
ENTER.  
Surround  
The acoustic properties of the passenger  
compartment are changed when speed  
increases or when the roof is opened. For  
this reason the character of the sound is  
automatically adapted to these situations in  
order to provide the best possible sound.  
The adaptation that takes place when the  
roof is opened is fully automatic.  
– Scroll to Equalizer front or Equalizer rear  
and press ENTER.  
2
Surround settings govern the spa-  
tial perception of the sound. Set-  
tings and activating/deactivating  
are separate for each audio source.  
– The graphic on the display indicates the  
audio level of the frequency in question.  
– Adjust the level with TUNING (4) or  
up/down on the navigation button. Addi-  
tional frequencies can be selected using  
the left/right navigation button.  
The Dolby icon on the display indicates that  
Dolby Pro Logic II is active. There are three  
different settings for surround sound:  
Pro Logic II  
– Use ENTER to save or EXIT to close.  
Optimum sound reproduction  
The audio system is calibrated for optimum  
sound reproduction by means of digital sig-  
nal processing.  
3 channel  
Off – 2-channel stereo.  
1
3
Option  
Not available in AM and FM mode  
2
4
5
Premium Sound  
Certain audio systems  
Not Performance Sound  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
209  
10 Infotainment system  
Audio functions  
This calibration takes into account loud-  
speakers, amplifiers, passenger compart-  
ment acoustics, listener position etc. for each  
combination of car model and audio system.  
10  
There is a also a dynamic calibration that  
takes into account the position of the volume  
control, radio reception and vehicle speed.  
The controls explained in these operating  
instructions, e.g. Bass, Treble and Equal-  
izer, are only intended for the user to be able  
to adapt the sound reproduction according  
to personal taste.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
210  
10 Infotainment system  
Radio functions  
Manual tuning  
– Select wavelength using AM/FM (1).  
Automatic storage of stations  
Radio controls  
AUTO (7) seeks out the ten strongest radio  
stations and stores them automatically in a  
separate memory. The function is especially  
useful in areas where one is unfamiliar with  
the radio stations and their frequencies.  
10  
1
2
3
– Adjust the frequency by turning  
TUNING (3).  
Tune into a station with a long press (left or  
right) on the navigation button or by using the  
steering wheel keypad:  
Starting automatic storage of stations  
– Select wavelength using AM/FM (1).  
– Hold the right or left side of the navigation  
button depressed until the desired fre-  
quency appears on the display.  
– Hold AUTO (7) depressed until  
Autostoring... appears on the display.  
7
4
5
6
As long as the frequency graphic appears on  
the display, searching can be resumed by  
briefly pressing the navigation button (left or  
right) (5).  
Once Autostoring... disappears from the dis-  
play, the stations are stored. The radio con-  
tinues in Auto mode and Auto appears on the  
display. The automatically stored stations  
can now be selected using the station preset  
buttons (2).  
Storing stations  
1. FM/AM – Wavelength selection  
Ten station presets can be stored per wave-  
length. FM has two memories for presets:  
FM1 and FM2. Preset stations are selected  
using the preset buttons (2) or the steering  
wheel keypad.  
2. Station presets  
Cancelling automatic storage of  
stations  
– Press EXIT (6).  
3. TUNING – Knob for station searches  
4. SCAN – Scanning  
5. Navigation button – Tuning and menus  
6. EXIT – Cancel current function  
7. AUTO – Automatic storage of stations  
Tuning  
Selecting an autostored preset  
Allowing the radio to remain in Auto mode  
provides access to the autostored presets.  
Storing stations manually  
– Tune into a station.  
– Briefly press AUTO (7).  
– Hold a station preset button depressed  
until the message Station stored appears  
on the display.  
Auto appears on the display.  
Automatic tuning  
– Select wavelength using AM/FM (1).  
– Press a preset button (2).  
The radio remains in Auto mode until it is  
exited by a brief press on AUTO (7), EXIT (6)  
or AM/FM (1).  
– Give a brief press, left or right, on the  
navigation button (5).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
211  
10 Infotainment system  
Radio functions  
– Press a preset button and hold it  
depressed until the message  
audio source and volume when the set pro-  
gramme type is no longer broadcast.  
Storing autostored presets in another  
memory  
An autostored preset can be transferred to  
the FM or AM memory.  
10  
Station stored appears on the display.  
The programme functions alarm (ALARM),  
traffic information (TP), news (NEWS), and  
programme types (PTY) interrupt one  
Scan is interrupted and the stored station  
can be selected as a preset.  
– Briefly press AUTO (7).  
another in order of priority, where alarm has  
the highest priority and programme types  
has the lowest. For further programme inter-  
ruption settings, see EON and REG on  
page 214. The programme functions are  
modified via the menu system, see page 206.  
RDS functions  
Auto appears on the display.  
Radio Data System – RDS links FM transmit-  
ters into a network. An FM transmitter in such  
a network sends information that gives an  
RDS radio the following functions:  
– Press a preset button.  
– Press the button under which the station  
will be stored and hold it depressed until  
the message Station stored appears on  
the display.  
• Automatically switches to a stronger  
transmitter if reception in the area is poor.  
The radio exits Auto mode and the stored  
station can be selected as a preset.  
Returning to the interrupted audio  
source  
Press EXIT to return to the interrupted audio  
source.  
• Searches for programme form, such as  
traffic information or news.  
Scanning  
• Receives text information on current radio  
programme.  
SCAN (4) automatically searches for strong  
AM or FM stations. When a station is found, it  
is played for approx. eight seconds before  
scanning is resumed.  
Alarm  
Some radio stations do not use RDS or only  
some if its functionality.  
This function is used to warn of serious acci-  
dents and catastrophes. The alarm cannot  
be temporarily interrupted or deactivated.  
The message ALARM! appears on the dis-  
play when an alarm message is transmitted.  
Programme functions  
Activating/deactivating Scan  
– Select wavelength using AM/FM.  
In FM mode, the radio can search for stations  
with certain programme types. If a desired  
programme type is found, the radio can  
switch stations, interrupting the audio source  
currently in use. For example, if the CD player  
is in use, it is paused. The interrupting trans-  
mission is played at a preset volume; see  
page 214. The radio returns to the previous  
– Press SCAN to activate.  
Traffic information – TP  
SCAN appears on the display. Cancel with  
SCAN or EXIT.  
This function allows traffic informa-  
tion sent within a set station’s RDS  
network to break through. TP indi-  
cates that the function is activated.  
If the set station can send traffic information  
Storing a station  
A desired station can be stored as a preset  
while Scan is active.  
then  
appears on the display.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
212  
10 Infotainment system  
Radio functions  
function allows programme types transmit-  
ted within a set station’s RDS network to  
break through.  
Activating/deactivating TP  
– Press MENU and then ENTER.  
News  
This function allows news broad-  
casts within a set station’s RDS  
network to break through. The mes-  
sage NEWS indicates that the func-  
10  
– Scroll to TP and press ENTER.  
Activating/deactivating PTY  
– Select FM1 or FM2 with FM/AM.  
TP from current station/all stations  
The radio can interrupt with traffic informa-  
tion from only the set (current) station or from  
all stations.  
tion is active.  
– Press MENU and then ENTER.  
– Scroll to PTY and press ENTER.  
– Scroll to Select PTY and press ENTER.  
Activating/deactivating News  
– Press MENU and then ENTER.  
– Select an FM station.  
– Scroll to News and press ENTER.  
– Press MENU and then ENTER.  
A list of programme types appears: Current  
affairs, Information etc. The PTY function is  
activated by selecting programme types and  
deactivated by clearing all PTYs.  
News from current station/all stations  
The radio can interrupt with news from only  
the set (current) station or from all stations.  
– Scroll to Advanced radio settings and  
press ENTER.  
– Scroll to TP and press ENTER.  
– Select an FM station.  
– Scroll to TP Station and press ENTER.  
– Select the desired programme types or  
– Press MENU and then ENTER.  
Either TP from current station or  
TP from all stations will appear on the dis-  
play.  
Clear all PTY.  
– Scroll to Advanced radio settings and  
press ENTER.  
Search PTY  
This function searches the entire wavelength  
for the selected programme type.  
– Press ENTER.  
– Scroll to News station and press ENTER.  
Activating/deactivating TP search  
TP search is useful during long journeys  
while an audio source other than the radio is  
being played. The function automatically  
searches for traffic information within differ-  
ent RDS networks.  
Either News from current station or  
News from all stations will appear on the  
display.  
– Activate PTY.  
– Press MENU and then ENTER.  
– Scroll to PTY and press ENTER.  
– Scroll to Search PTY and press ENTER.  
– Press ENTER.  
If the radio finds any of the selected pro-  
gramme types, >| To seek appears on the  
display. Press the navigation button to the  
right to continue searching for another  
broadcast of the selected programme types.  
Programme types – PTY  
– Press MENU and then ENTER.  
The PTY function can be used to  
select different programme types,  
such as Pop music and  
– Scroll to Advanced radio settings and  
press ENTER.  
Serious classic. The PTY symbol  
indicates that the function is active. The  
– Scroll to TP and press ENTER.  
– Scroll to TP search and press ENTER.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
213  
10 Infotainment system  
Radio functions  
1
Distant – interrupts if the station trans-  
Activating/deactivating AF  
– Press MENU and then ENTER.  
Display of programme type  
The programme type of the current station  
can be shown on the display.  
mitter is far away, even if there is a lot of  
static.  
10  
– Scroll to Advanced radio settings and  
press ENTER.  
Off – no interruption for programmes from  
other transmitters.  
NOTE  
– Scroll to AF and press ENTER.  
Regional radio programmes – REG  
Not all radio stations support this function.  
Activating/deactivating EON  
This function causes the radio to  
continue with a regional transmitter  
even if its signal strength is low.  
REG indicates that the function is  
active. The regional function is normally  
deactivated.  
– Press MENU and then ENTER.  
– Scroll to Advanced radio settings and  
press ENTER.  
Activating/deactivating display  
– Press MENU and then ENTER.  
– Scroll to EON and press ENTER.  
– Scroll to PTY and press ENTER.  
– Scroll to Show PTY and press ENTER.  
Radio text  
Some RDS stations transmit information on  
programme content, artists, etc. This infor-  
mation can be shown on the display.  
– Scroll to Local, Distant or Off and press  
ENTER.  
Resetting RDS functions  
Resets all radio settings to the original fac-  
tory settings.  
Activating/deactivating REG  
– Press MENU and then ENTER.  
– Scroll to Advanced radio settings and  
press ENTER.  
– Press MENU and then ENTER.  
Activating/deactivating radio text  
– Press MENU and then ENTER.  
– Scroll to Regional and press ENTER.  
– Scroll to Advanced radio settings and  
press ENTER.  
Enhanced Other Networks – EON  
– Scroll to Radio text and press ENTER.  
– Scroll to Reset all and press ENTER.  
The EON function is particularly useful in  
urban areas with many regional radio sta-  
tions. It allows the distance between the car  
and the radio station transmitter determine  
when programme functions should interrupt  
the current audio source.  
Automatic frequency update – AF  
Volume control, programme types  
The AF function selects one of the strongest  
transmitters for a set station. The radio may  
sometimes need to search through the entire  
FM wavelength to find a strong transmitter. If  
this occurs, the radio mutes and PI seek  
Exit to cancel appears on the display.  
The interrupting programme form is heard at  
the volume selected for such. If the volume  
level is adjusted during the programme inter-  
ruption, the new level is saved until the next  
programme interruption.  
Local – interrupts only if the radio station  
transmitter is close.  
1
Default/Factory setting  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
214  
10 Infotainment system  
CD functions  
started automatically. Otherwise, load a disc  
and change to CD mode by pressing MODE.  
Pause  
CD function controls  
If the volume is turned down completely, the  
CD player is stopped. The player is restarted  
when volume is increased.  
10  
4
Starting playback (CD changer)  
If a CD position with a music CD is already  
selected when the audio system is activated  
then playback starts automatically. Other-  
wise change to CD changer mode using  
MODE and select a disc with the number  
buttons 16 or Up/Down on the navigation  
button.  
1
Audio files  
The CD player also supports MP3 and WMA  
format audio files.  
3
2
5
6
NOTE  
Certain types of copy-protected audio files  
cannot be read by the player.  
Inserting a CD (CD changer)  
– Select an empty position with buttons 16  
or Up/Down on the navigation button.  
1
When a CD containing audio files is inserted  
into the player the disc’s directory structure  
is read in. It may take a while before playback  
starts depending on the quality of the disc.  
An empty position is marked on the display.  
The text Insert disc shows that a new disc  
can be inserted. The CD changer can hold up  
to six CDs.  
1. Navigation button – Fast forward/rewind,  
track selection and menus  
1
2. CD changer position selection  
Navigation and playback  
– Insert a CD in the slot of the CD changer.  
3. CD insertion/eject  
If a disc containing audio files is inside the  
CD player then ENTER leads to the disc’s  
directory structure. The directory structure is  
navigated in the same way as the audio sys-  
tem’s menu structure. Audio files have the  
CD eject  
4. CD insertion/eject slot  
A CD will stay in the ejected position for  
approx. 12 seconds. Following which it is re-  
inserted into the player and playback contin-  
ues.  
5. MODE – Audio source selection CD and  
AUX  
6. TUNING – Knob for track selection  
symbol  
and directories have the  
Eject individual discs by pressing the eject  
button (3).  
Starting playback (CD player)  
If a music CD is in the player when the audio  
system is in CD mode then playback is  
symbol  
ENTER.  
. Start audio file playback with  
Eject all discs with one long press on the  
eject button. The entire magazine is emptied  
disc by disc. The message Eject all is shown  
in the display.  
When the playback of a file is finished the  
playback of the other files in the same direc-  
tory continues. Directory change takes place  
1
High Performance and Premium Sound  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
215  
10 Infotainment system  
CD functions  
automatically when all files in the current  
directory have been played back.  
Different messages appear on the display  
depending on which random function has  
been selected.  
If a CD with audio files is being played:  
– Press MENU and then ENTER.  
10  
Press left/right on the navigation button if the  
display is not wide enough to show the whole  
audio file name.  
– Scroll to Random and press ENTER.  
RANDOM means that the tracks from only  
one music CD are played  
– Scroll to Single disc or Folder and press  
ENTER.  
RND ALL means that all tracks on all  
music CDs in the CD changer are played.  
The function is deactivated when another CD  
is selected.  
Fast-wind/change CD tracks and audio  
files  
RANDOM FOLDER means that the audio  
files in a directory on the current CD are  
played.  
Short presses right/left on the navigation  
button are used to scroll between CD tracks/  
audio files. Long presses are used to fast-  
wind CD tracks/audio files. TUNING (or the  
steering wheel keypad) can also be used for  
this purpose.  
Disc text  
If title information is stored on a music CD it  
1
Activating/deactivating (CD player)  
– If a normal music CD is being played:  
can be shown on the display .  
Activating/deactivating  
– Start CD playback.  
– Press MENU and then ENTER.  
– Press MENU and then ENTER.  
– Scroll to Random and press ENTER.  
If a disc with audio files is being played:  
Scan CD  
– Scroll to Disc text and press ENTER.  
This function plays the first ten seconds of  
each CD track/audio file. Press SCAN to  
activate. Interrupt with EXIT or SCAN to  
continue playback of the current CD track/  
audio file.  
– Press MENU and then ENTER.  
CDs  
– Scroll to Random and press ENTER.  
– Scroll to Folder or Disc and press ENTER.  
Using low quality CD discs could result in  
poor or non-existent sound.  
Activating/deactivating (CD changer)  
If a normal music CD is being played:  
IMPORTANT  
Random  
– Press MENU and then ENTER.  
Only use standard discs (12 cm in diame-  
ter). Do not use CDs with adhesive disc la-  
bels. The heat in the CD player may cause  
the label to come off, damaging the CD  
player.  
This function plays the tracks in random  
order. The random CD tracks/audio files can  
be scrolled through in the normal way.  
– Scroll to Random and press ENTER.  
– Scroll to Single disc or All discs and press  
ENTER.  
The option All discs only applies to the  
music CDs in the changer.  
NOTE  
It is only possible to scroll between random  
CD tracks on the current disc.  
1
Only applies to CD changer  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
216  
10 Infotainment system  
Menu structure – audio system  
FM menu  
AUX menu  
1. News  
1. AUX volume  
10  
2. TP  
2. News  
3. PTY  
3. TP  
1
4. Radio text  
5. Advanced radio settings  
4. Audio settings  
1
6. Audio settings  
AM menu  
1. Audio settings  
1
CD menu  
1. Random  
2. News  
3. TP  
4. Disc text  
1
5. Audio settings  
CD changer menu  
1. Random  
2. News  
3. TP  
4. Disc text  
1
5. Audio settings  
1
Certain audio systems.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
217  
10 Infotainment system  
Phone functions (option)  
2
3
4
10  
1
5
6
Phone system components  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
218  
10 Infotainment system  
Phone functions (option)  
SIM card  
Phone system components  
1. Antenna  
Emergency calls  
Emergency calls to alarm centres can be  
made without a SIM card as long as there is  
coverage by a GSM operator.  
10  
2. Steering wheel keypad (option)  
Most phone system functions can be  
accessed via the keypad. See page 220.  
Making an emergency call  
– Activate the phone.  
– Ring the emergency number that applies  
to your region (within EU: 112).  
3. Microphone  
The handsfree microphone is integrated in  
the roof console beside the rearview mirror.  
– Press ENTER.  
IDIS  
(Intelligent Driver Information System) The  
IDIS system allows incoming phone calls and  
text (SMS) messages to be delayed so that  
the driver can concentrate on driving. Incom-  
ing calls and text messages can be delayed  
five seconds before they are connected.  
Missed calls are shown on the display.  
IDIS can be deactivated using menu func-  
tion 5.6.2. See page 226.  
4. Centre console control panel  
All phone functions (except call volume) can  
be regulated via the control panel.  
The phone can only be used with a valid SIM  
card (Subscriber Identity Module). The card  
is available from various network operators.  
Contact your network provider if you experi-  
ence difficulties with the SIM card.  
5. Privacy handset (option)  
6. SIM card reader  
General  
NOTE  
• Always put traffic safety first.  
The built-in phone cannot read 3G only SIM  
cards. Combined 3G/GSM cards do work.  
Contact your network operator if you need  
to change your SIM card.  
• If the driver needs to use the privacy  
handset, park the car in a safe place first.  
• Switch off the phone system when refuel-  
ling the car.  
• Switch off the system near blasting work.  
• Only entrust phone system servicing to an  
authorised Volvo workshop.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
219  
10 Infotainment system  
Phone functions (option)  
1
Phone controls  
Steering wheel keypad  
Double SIM cards  
Many network operators offer two SIM cards  
for the same phone number. The extra SIM  
card can be used in the car.  
10  
1
2
1
2
Inserting the SIM card  
– Switch off the phone and open the glove-  
box.  
3
– Pull out the SIM card holder (1) in the SIM  
card reader.  
– Position the SIM card in the holder with  
the metal surface visible. The bevelled  
edge of the SIM card should align with the  
bevel of the SIM card holder.  
7
6
5
3
4
4
– Carefully press in the SIM card holder.  
Centre console control panel  
When the phone is active, the steering wheel  
keypad is locked to phone functions. To con-  
trol the audio system, the phone must be in  
standby mode.  
Menus  
1. VOLUME – Control the background vol-  
ume from the radio, for example, during a  
call.  
Page 206 describes how to control phone  
functions with the menu system.  
Traffic safety  
2. Number and letter buttons  
1. ENTER – Works the same as on the  
For safety reasons, parts of the phone menu  
system cannot be accessed at speeds in  
excess of 8 km/h. Only activities started in  
the menu system can be completed. The  
speed limiter can be deactivated using menu  
function 5.6.1 Menu lock, see page 225.  
3. MENU – Opens the main menu  
control panel.  
4. EXIT – End/refuse calls, clear entered  
2. EXIT – Works the same as on the  
characters  
control panel  
5. Navigation button – Scroll in menus  
and character rows  
3. Call volume – Increase/decrease  
4. Navigation buttons – Scroll in menus  
6. ENTER – Accept calls, activate the  
phone from standby mode  
7. PHONE – On/off and standby mode  
1
Certain markets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
220  
10 Infotainment system  
Phone functions (option)  
– Press PHONE or EXIT.  
Call waiting  
On/Off  
A two-tone signal during a phone call indi-  
cates that there is another incoming call.  
Answer? appears on the display. The call  
can be refused or taken in the normal man-  
ner. If the incoming call is taken, the previous  
call is put on hold.  
Activating from standby mode  
– Press PHONE.  
A handset appears on the display when the  
phone system is active or in standby mode. If  
the ignition key is turned to position 0 when  
the phone is in one of these modes, the  
phone automatically resumes this mode the  
next time the key is turned to position I or II.  
10  
Making and receiving calls  
If the privacy handset is raised when a phone  
call is started, the sound will come from the  
handsfree system. For information on switch-  
ing between privacy handset and handsfree  
during a call, see page 223.  
Putting a call on hold/resuming a call  
– Press MENU.  
– Scroll to Hold or Hold off and press  
ENTER.  
Activating the phone system  
Phone system functions can only be used  
when the phone is in active mode.  
To call  
– Activate the phone system (if necessary).  
– Press PHONE.  
Dialling a third party  
– Put the call on hold.  
– Dial the number of the third party.  
– Dial the number or use the phone book,  
see page 223.  
– Enter the PIN code (if necessary) and  
press ENTER.  
– Press ENTER or lift the handset. Release  
the handset by pressing it down.  
Deactivating the phone system  
No calls can be received when the phone is  
deactivated.  
Switching between calls  
– Press MENU.  
Receiving a call  
For Auto answer, see menu option 4.3,  
page 225.  
– Scroll to Swap and press ENTER.  
– Hold PHONE depressed until the phone is  
activated.  
Starting a conference call  
A conference call consists of at least three  
parties that can talk to one another. Once a  
conference call has been initiated, no more  
parties can be connected. All calls are ended  
when the conference call is ended.  
– Press ENTER or lift the handset. Release  
Standby  
the handset by pressing it down.  
In standby mode, the audio system can be in  
use while calls are received. However, it is  
not possible to make calls when in standby  
mode.  
Ending a call  
– Press EXIT or hang up the handset.  
– Start two phone calls  
– Press MENU.  
Refusing a call  
– Press EXIT.  
Putting the phone in standby mode  
The phone must first be in active mode  
before it can be put in standby mode.  
– Scroll to Join and press ENTER.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
221  
10 Infotainment system  
Phone functions (option)  
button, twice for the second, etc. See  
table.  
Volume  
Handling numbers  
The phone uses the driver’s door or centre  
10  
Calling the last number dialled  
The phone automatically stores the last  
phone numbers dialled.  
1
– Press 1 for a space. If two characters in a  
row are to be entered using the same  
button, press * or wait a few seconds.  
speaker .  
Call volume  
A brief press on EXIT will clear an entered  
character. A long press on EXIT will clear all  
entered characters.  
Call volume is regulated with  
the buttons of the steering  
wheel keypad.  
– Press ENTER.  
– Scroll to a number and press ENTER.  
Phone book  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
*
space 1- ? ! , . : " ' ( )  
a b c 2 ä å à æ ç  
d e f 3 è é  
If the privacy handset is  
used, volume is regulated  
with a wheel on the side of  
the handset.  
If the phone book contains the desired  
party’s contact information, this are shown  
on the display. Contact information can be  
stored on the SIM card and in the phone.  
g h i 4 ì  
j k l 5  
Storing contacts in the phone book  
– Press MENU.  
– Scroll to Phone book and press ENTER.  
– Scroll to New number and press ENTER.  
– Enter a name and press ENTER.  
Audio system volume  
m n o 6 ñ ö ò Ø  
p q r s 7 ß  
Audio system volume is temporarily lowered  
during a phone call. Once the call is ended  
the previous volume is resumed. If the vol-  
ume is regulated during the call, the new  
level is retained once the call is ended.  
Sound can also be automatically muted dur-  
ing a phone call; see menu 5.5.3, page 226.  
This function is only available with the Volvo  
integrated phone system.  
t u v 8 ü ù  
w x y z 9  
Used if two characters are to be  
ended with the same button.  
– Enter a number and press ENTER.  
– Scroll to SIM card or Phone and press  
ENTER.  
0
#
+ 0 @ * # & $ £ / %  
Switch between upper and lower  
case.  
Searching for contacts in the phone  
book  
Use the down arrow of the navigation button  
instead of MENU for direct access to the  
Search menu.  
Entering text  
Text is entered using the phone keypad.  
– Press the button with the desired charac-  
ter - once for the first character on the  
– Press MENU.  
– Scroll to Phone book and press ENTER.  
1
Premium Sound  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
222  
10 Infotainment system  
Phone functions (option)  
– Scroll to Search and press ENTER.  
Speed dial  
Calling from the phone book  
– Press MENU.  
A keypad button (1-9) can be used as a  
speed dial number for a contact in the phone  
book.  
– Enter the first few letters of the item and  
press ENTER, or simply press ENTER.  
10  
– Scroll to Phone book and press ENTER.  
– Scroll to an item and press ENTER.  
All contacts in the phone book memory are  
displayed. The number of contacts displayed  
can be reduced by entering part of the con-  
tact’s name.  
– Press MENU.  
Copying entries between the SIM card  
and Phone book  
– Press MENU.  
– Scroll to Phone book and press ENTER.  
– Scroll to One-key dial and press ENTER.  
– Scroll to Phone book and press ENTER.  
– Scroll to Select numbers and press  
ENTER.  
– Scroll to a contact and press ENTER.  
– Scroll to Copy all and press ENTER.  
– Scroll to the digit of the keypad button for  
NOTE  
– Scroll to SIM to phone or Phone to SIM  
the speed dial number and press ENTER.  
and press ENTER.  
Press ENTER to dial.  
– Enter the first few letters of the item and  
press ENTER, or simply press ENTER.  
Deleting contacts from the phone book  
– Press MENU.  
Functions during a call  
– Scroll to an item and press ENTER.  
– Scroll to Phone book and press ENTER.  
Several functions are available during a call.  
Some functions can only be used when a call  
is on hold.  
– Hold EXIT depressed to leave the menu  
system.  
– Scroll to Search and press ENTER.  
– Enter the first few letters of the item and  
press ENTER, or simply press ENTER.  
Calling using speed dial  
Press MENU to access the In-call menu and  
scroll to one of the following alternatives:  
– Hold the desired keypad button for  
approx. two seconds or briefly press the  
button and then ENTER.  
– Scroll to the item to be erased and press  
ENTER.  
Mute/Mute off – Mute mode.  
– Scroll to Erase and press ENTER.  
Hold/Hold off – Put a call on hold or  
resume a call.  
Erase all contacts  
– Press MENU.  
NOTE  
When the phone is switched on, it takes a  
while before speed dialling is available.  
Handsfree/Handset – Use handsfree or  
the privacy handset.  
– Scroll to Phone book and press ENTER.  
– Scroll to Erase SIM or Erase phone and  
press ENTER.  
Phone book – Access the phone book.  
To use the speed dial function One-key dial  
must be activated in the Phone book menu,  
see page 227.  
Join – Conference calling (available if  
more than three parties are connected)  
If required, enter phone code. The factory-  
set default code is 1234.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
223  
10 Infotainment system  
Phone functions (option)  
Swap – Switch between two calls (availa-  
Specifications  
ble if up to three parties are connected).  
Output  
2 W  
10  
SMS – Short Message Service  
SIM card  
Small  
1
Memory entries  
255  
Reading SMS  
– Press MENU.  
SMS (Short Message  
Service)  
Yes  
– Scroll to Messages and press ENTER.  
– Scroll to Read and press ENTER.  
– Scroll to a message and press ENTER.  
Data/Fax  
No  
Dualband (900/1800 MHz) Yes  
1
The capacity of the SIM card’s memory varies  
The message text appears in the display.  
Additional selections can be made by press-  
ing ENTER. Hold EXIT depressed to leave  
the menu system.  
depending on the subscription.  
Writing and sending  
– Press MENU.  
– Scroll to Messages and press ENTER.  
– Scroll to Write new and press ENTER.  
– Enter text and press ENTER.  
– Scroll to Send and press ENTER.  
– Enter a phone number and press ENTER.  
IMEI number  
To block the phone, you must provide your  
network operator with the phone’s IMEI  
number. This is a 15 digit serial number that  
is programmed into the phone. Dial *#06# to  
display this number. Make a note of this  
number and keep it in a safe place.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
224  
10 Infotainment system  
Menu structure – phone  
Overview  
3. Phone book  
3.1. New number  
3.2. Search  
5. Phone sett.  
5.1. Network  
1. Call register  
10  
5.1.1.  
5.1.2.  
Auto  
Manual select  
1.1. Missed calls  
1.2. Received calls  
1.3. Dialled no.  
1.4. Erase list  
3.3. Copy all  
3.3.1.  
SIM to phone  
5.2. Language  
3.3.2.  
Phone to SIM  
5.2.1.  
5.2.2.  
5.2.3.  
5.2.4.  
5.2.5.  
5.2.6.  
5.2.7.  
5.2.8.  
5.2.9.  
English UK  
English US  
Español  
Français CAN  
Français FR  
Italiano  
Nederlands  
Português BR  
Português P  
3.4. One-key dial  
1.4.1.  
1.4.2.  
1.4.3.  
1.4.4.  
All calls  
3.4.1.  
Active  
Missed calls  
Received calls  
Dialled no.  
3.4.2.  
Select numbers  
3.5. Erase SIM  
3.6. Erase phone  
3.7. Memory status  
1.5. Call duration  
1.5.1.  
1.5.2.  
1.5.3.  
1.5.4.  
Last call  
Call count  
Total time  
Reset timers  
4. Call options  
4.1. Send my no.  
4.2. Call waiting  
4.3. Auto answer  
4.4. Auto re-dial  
4.5. Diversions  
5.2.10. Suomi  
5.2.11. Svenska  
5.2.12. Dansk  
2. Messages  
2.1. Read  
2.2. Write  
5.2.13. Deutsch  
5.3. SIM security  
4.5.1.  
4.5.2.  
4.5.3.  
4.5.4.  
4.5.5.  
4.5.6.  
4.5.7.  
All calls  
5.3.1.  
5.3.2.  
5.3.3.  
On  
Off  
Auto  
2.3. Message sett  
When engag.  
Not answered  
Not reachable  
Fax calls  
Data calls  
Cancel all  
2.3.1.  
2.3.2.  
2.3.3.  
SMSC number  
Validity time  
Message type  
5.4. Edit codes  
5.4.1.  
5.4.2.  
PIN code  
Phone code  
5.5. Sounds  
5.5.1.  
5.5.2.  
Ring volume  
Ring signal  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
225  
10 Infotainment system  
Menu structure – phone  
5.5.3.  
5.5.4.  
5.6. Traff. safety  
5.6.1.  
5.6.2.  
5.7. Factory sett.  
Mute radio  
Msg. beep  
Description of menu options  
1. Call register  
1.1. Missed calls  
List of missed calls. You can choose to call,  
erase or store the number in the phone book.  
1.5.3.  
1.5.4.  
Total time  
Reset timers  
10  
Menu lock  
IDIS  
2. Messages  
2.1. Read  
Received text messages. Select whether to  
erase, forward, change or save the entire  
message or parts of it.  
1.2. Received calls  
List of received calls. You can choose to call,  
erase or store the number in the phone book.  
2.2. Write  
Write a message using the keypad. Choose  
whether to save or send it.  
1.3. Dialled no.  
List of previously dialled numbers. You can  
choose to call, erase or store the number in  
the phone book.  
2.3. Message sett  
Enter the number (SMSC number) of the  
message centre to which messages are to be  
transferred as well as how long they are to be  
saved at the message centre. Contact your  
network operator for information on message  
settings. Normally, these settings should not  
be altered.  
1.4. Erase list  
Erase the lists found in the menus 1.1, 1.2  
and 1.3 as below.  
1.4.1.  
1.4.2.  
1.4.3.  
1.4.4.  
All  
Missed  
Received  
Dialled no.  
2.3.1.  
2.3.2.  
2.3.3.  
SMSC number  
Validity time  
Message type  
1.5. Call duration  
Duration of all calls or of the most recent call.  
The phone code is required to reset the call  
timer (see menu 5.4).  
3. Phone book  
3.1. New number  
Store names and phone numbers in the  
phone book, see page 222.  
1.5.1.  
1.5.2.  
Last call  
Call count  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
226  
10 Infotainment system  
Menu structure – phone  
3.2. Search  
Search for a name in the phone book.  
4.2. Call waiting  
Be alerted during a phone call that there is  
another incoming call.  
5.2. Language  
Select the phone language.  
10  
3.3. Copy all  
Copy phone numbers and names from the  
SIM card to the phone memory.  
5.2.1.  
5.2.2.  
5.2.3.  
5.2.4.  
5.2.5.  
5.2.6.  
5.2.7.  
5.2.8.  
5.2.9.  
English UK  
English US  
Español  
Français CAN  
Français FR  
Italiano  
Nederlands  
Português BR  
Português P  
4.3. Auto answer  
Automatically answers incoming calls.  
3.3.1.  
3.3.2.  
From SIM to phone memory  
From phone to SIM memory  
4.4. Auto re-dial  
Calls a previously engaged number.  
3.4. One-key dial  
A number stored in the phone book can be  
stored as a speed dial number.  
4.5. Diversions  
Choose when and what type of calls are to  
be diverted to a specified phone number.  
3.5. Erase SIM  
Erase the entire SIM card memory.  
4.5.1.  
All calls (this setting only applies  
during the call in progress).  
When engag.  
Not answered  
Not reachable  
Fax calls  
Data calls  
Cancel all  
5.2.10. Suomi  
5.2.11. Svenska  
5.2.12. Dansk  
5.2.13. Deutsch  
4.5.2.  
4.5.3.  
4.5.4.  
4.5.5.  
4.5.6.  
4.5.7.  
3.6. Erase phone  
Erase the entire phone memory.  
3.7. Memory status  
5.3. SIM security  
Shows how many positions are occupied in  
the SIM card and phone memory. The table  
shows how many of the total number of posi-  
tions are occupied, e.g. 100 (250).  
Select if the PIN code should be on, off or if  
the phone should automatically give the PIN  
code.  
5.3.1.  
5.3.2.  
5.3.3.  
On  
Off  
Auto  
5. Phone settings  
5.1. Network  
Choose a network automatically or manually.  
The selected operator is shown on the dis-  
play in the phone’s basic mode.  
4. Call options  
4.1. Send my no.  
Displays or hides your phone number to/from  
the person you call. Contact your network  
operator regarding ex-directory numbers.  
5.4. Edit codes  
Change PIN or phone code. Make a note of  
the codes and keep them in a safe place.  
5.1.1.  
5.1.2.  
Auto  
Manual select  
5.4.1.  
PIN code  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
227  
10 Infotainment system  
Menu structure – phone  
5.4.2.  
Phone code. The factory-set  
phone code 1234 is used until  
you change to your own code.  
The phone code is used to reset  
the call timer.  
10  
5.5. Sounds  
5.5.1.  
Volume. Adjust the ring tone  
volume.  
5.5.2.  
Ring signal. There are seven  
different ring tones.  
Mute radio: On/Off  
Msg. beep  
5.5.3.  
5.5.4.  
5.6. Traffic safety  
5.6.1.  
Menu lock. Deactivating the  
menu lock allows access to the  
entire menu while driving.  
IDIS. If the IDIS function is  
deactivated, incoming calls are  
not delayed, regardless of the  
driving situation.  
5.6.2.  
5.7. Factory sett.  
Reset the system’s factory settings.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
228  
10 Infotainment system  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
229  
Type designation ....................................................................................232  
Dimensions and weights ........................................................................233  
Engine specifications............................................................................. 235  
Engine oil ................................................................................................237  
Fluids and lubricants ..............................................................................241  
Fuel .........................................................................................................242  
Catalytic converter .................................................................................244  
Electrical system ....................................................................................245  
Type approval .........................................................................................247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
230  
SPECIFICATIONS  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11 Specifications  
Type designation  
Knowing the car’s type designation, vehicle  
identification and engine numbers can facili-  
tate all contact with a Volvo dealer regarding  
the car and when ordering spare parts and  
accessories.  
1
11  
1. Type designation, vehicle identification  
number, maximum permissible weights,  
codes for colour and upholstery and type  
approval number.  
HFGDOIHV  
2
HFGJJFFIO  
BFDRYOIHV  
Gfdr_urtv  
b
Seyj_tu  
Fkfu  
Seyj_tu  
Fkfu  
Ohtk_jdtr  
Mgdh_ ytegf  
Ehdfjljl_ncy  
2. Decal for parking heater.  
3. Engine type designation, component  
and serial number.  
3
4
B5254S  
1234567  
4. Decal for engine oil.  
5. Gearbox type designation and serial  
number:  
(a) manual gearbox  
(b) automatic gearbox  
Engine oil quality: XXX  
Viscosity: XXX  
6. VIN number (type and model year des-  
ignation plus chassis number).  
Further information on the car is presented in  
the registration document.  
5
AISNI AW  
CO LTD  
P 1208632  
M56L  
3,77  
6
MADE IN JAPAN  
55-50  
SERIAL NO  
T
100001  
YV1LS5502N2000327  
A
B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
232  
11 Specifications  
Dimensions and weights  
Dimensions  
C
11  
E2  
E1  
F
G
H
I
D
A
B
Position in  
illustration  
Dimensions  
mm  
A
Wheelbase  
Length  
Load length  
Boot lid, raised  
Height  
2640  
4582  
850  
approx. 200  
1400  
approx. 2000  
1550  
1560  
B
C
D
E1  
E2  
F
G
H
I
Height  
Front track  
Rear track  
Width  
1836  
Width including door mirrors 2025  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
233  
11 Specifications  
Dimensions and weights  
Trailer with brakes  
Weights  
Maximum  
towball load  
(kg)  
Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank  
90 % full and all fluids. The weight of passen-  
gers and accessories, such as a towbar, load  
carriers, space box etc. and towball load  
(when a trailer is hitched, see table), influ-  
ences the payload and must not be included  
in the kerb weight. Permitted weight (in addi-  
tion to driver) = Gross vehicle weight – Kerb  
weight.  
Maximum trailer  
weight (kg)  
2
1
1500  
75  
11  
Trailer without brakes  
Maximum  
towball load  
(kg)  
Maximum trailer  
weight (kg)  
WARNING  
700  
50  
3
4
5
The car’s driving characteristics change  
depending on how heavily it is loaded and  
how the load is distributed.  
See decal location on page 232.  
1. Gross vehicle weight  
2. Max. train weight (car+trailer)  
3. Max. front axle load  
4. Max. rear axle load  
5. Equipment level  
Maximum load: See registration document.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
234  
11 Specifications  
Engine specifications  
2.4  
2.4i  
T5  
Engine designation  
Output (kW/rpm)  
(hp/rpm)  
B5244S5  
103/5000  
140/5000  
220/4000  
5
B5244S4  
125/6000  
170/6000  
230/4400  
5
B5254T7  
169/5000  
230/5000  
320/1500–5000  
5
11  
Torque (Nm/rpm)  
No. of cylinders  
Bore (mm)  
83  
83  
83  
Stroke (mm)  
90.0  
90.0  
93.2  
Swept volume (litres)  
Compression ratio  
2.44  
2.44  
2.52  
10.3:1  
10.3:1  
9.0:1  
Engine type designation, component and  
serial number can be read on the engine, see  
page 232.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
235  
11 Specifications  
Engine specifications  
2.0D  
2.4D  
D5  
1
Engine designation  
D4204T  
D5244T8  
D5244T9  
Output (kW/rpm)  
(hp/rpm)  
100/4000  
136/4000  
320/2000  
4
120/5500  
163/5500  
136/4000  
185/4000  
11  
Torque (Nm/rpm)  
No. of cylinders  
Bore (mm)  
340/1750-2750 350/222-2700  
5
5
85  
81  
81  
Stroke (mm)  
88.0  
93.2  
2.40  
17.0:1  
93.2  
2.40  
17.0:1  
Swept volume (litres)  
Compression ratio  
2.00  
18.5:1  
1
Belgium  
Engine type designation, component and  
serial number can be read on the engine, see  
page 232.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
236  
11 Specifications  
Engine oil  
Adverse driving conditions  
Check the oil level more frequently for long  
journeys:  
IMPORTANT  
In order to fulfil the requirements for the en-  
gine’s service intervals all engines are filled  
with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil  
at the factory. The choice of oil has been  
made very carefully with regard to service  
life, starting characteristics, fuel consump-  
tion and environmental impact.  
• towing a caravan or trailer.  
• in mountainous regions.  
• at high speeds.  
11  
• in temperatures colder than –30 C or hot-  
ter than +40 C.  
An approved engine oil must be used in  
order that the recommended service inter-  
vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed  
grade of oil (see the engine compartment  
decal) for both filling and oil change, other-  
wise you will risk affecting service life, start-  
ing characteristics, fuel consumption and  
environmental impact.  
This can produce abnormally high oil temper-  
ature or oil consumption.  
Also check the oil level more often if the  
car is often driven short distances (less  
than 10 km) when temperatures are low  
(below +5 C).  
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all warran-  
ty liability if engine oil of the prescribed  
grade and viscosity is not used.  
Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for  
adverse driving conditions. It provides extra  
protection for the engine.  
Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.  
Viscosity chart  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
237  
11 Specifications  
Engine oil  
Oil decal  
When the oil decal shown alongside here is in  
the car’s engine compartment, the following  
applies. See location on page 232.  
Oil grade: ACEA A3/B3/B4  
Viscosity: SAE 0W–30  
Engine oil quality: ACEA A3/B3/B4  
Viscosity: SAE 0W-30  
11  
When driving under adverse conditions, use  
ACEA A5/B5 SAE 0W-30.  
1
Volume between  
MIN–MAX (litres)  
Volume  
(litres)  
Engine variant  
2
2.4  
2.4i  
T5  
1.3  
5.8  
B5244S5  
B5244S4  
2
2
B5254T7  
1
Including filter change.  
2
Does not apply to Europe, for Europe see page 240.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
238  
11 Specifications  
Engine oil  
When the oil decal shown alongside here is in  
the car’s engine compartment, the following  
applies. See location on page 232.  
Oil decal  
Oil grade: WSS-M2C913-B  
Viscosity: SAE 5W–30  
Engine oil quality: WSS-M2C913-B  
Viscosity: SAE 5W-30  
11  
When driving under adverse conditions, use  
ACEA A5/B5 SAE 0W-30.  
1
Volume between  
MIN–MAX (litres)  
Volume  
(litres)  
Engine variant  
D5  
D5244T8  
1.5  
6.0  
2.4D  
2.0D  
D5244T9  
D4204T  
2.0  
5.5  
1
Including filter change  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
239  
11 Specifications  
Engine oil  
Oil decal  
When the oil decal shown alongside here is in  
the car’s engine compartment, the following  
applies. See location on page 232.  
Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5  
Viscosity: SAE 0W–30  
Engine oil quality: ACEA A5/B5  
Viscosity: SAE 0W-30  
11  
1
Volume between  
MIN–MAX (litres)  
Volume  
(litres)  
Engine variant  
2
2.4  
2.4i  
T5  
B5244S5  
B5244S4  
B5254T7  
1.3  
5.5  
1
Including filter change  
2
Europe only, for other markets, see page 238.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
240  
11 Specifications  
Fluids and lubricants  
Fluid  
System  
Volume (litres) Recommended oil grade  
Gearbox oil  
2.4 Manual 5-speed  
2.4i Manual 5-speed  
T5 Manual 6-speed  
T5 Automatic gearbox  
2.0D Manual 6 speed  
D5 Automatic gearbox  
5-cyl. manual gearbox  
5-cyl. automatic gearbox  
4-cyl. Diesel (2.0D)  
2.1  
Transmission fluid: MTF 97309-10  
2.1  
2.0  
11  
7. 7 5  
Transmission fluid: JWS 3309  
Transmission fluid: WSD-M2C200-C  
Transmission fluid: JWS 3309  
1.7  
7. 7 5  
Coolant  
9.5  
Coolant with corrosion inhibitor mixed with  
water, see packaging. The thermostat starts  
opening at 90 ºC  
10.0  
9.5  
1
180–200 grams  
500–600 grams  
0.6  
Compressor oil PAG  
Refrigerant R134a (HFC134a)  
DOT 4+  
Air conditioning  
Brake fluid  
Power steering  
1.0–1.2  
Power steering fluid: WSS M2C204-A or  
equivalent product with same specifications.  
Washer fluid  
5-cyl. Petrol/5-cyl. Diesel  
See page 242  
6.5  
Use a washer antifreeze recommended by Volvo,  
mixed with water for temperatures below  
freezing.  
Fuel tank  
1
Weights can vary depending on the engine variant. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop for the exact information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
241  
11 Specifications  
Fuel  
Consumption, emissions and volume  
Emissions of  
carbon dioxide  
Consumption  
litre/100 km  
Tank volume  
(litres)  
Engine  
Gearbox  
(CO ) g/km  
2
2.4  
2.4i  
T5  
B5244S5  
B5244S4  
B5254T7  
Manual 5-speed (M56)  
8.9  
9.6  
9.0  
9.6  
9.1  
9.8  
7. 3  
212  
229  
215  
229  
217  
234  
193  
193  
161  
161  
62  
11  
Automatic gearbox (AW55-50/51)  
Manual 5-speed (M56)  
Automatic gearbox (AW55-50/51)  
Manual 6-speed (M66)  
Automatic gearbox (AW55-50/51)  
Automatic gearbox (AW55-51)  
Automatic gearbox (AW55-51)  
Manual 6 speed (MMT6)  
D5244T8  
60  
52  
2.4D  
2.0D  
D5244T9  
7. 3  
D4204T (EURO3)  
(EURO4)  
6.1  
6.1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
242  
11 Specifications  
Fuel  
Fuel consumption and emissions of  
carbon dioxide  
Petrol  
Diesel  
Most engines can be run with octane ratings  
of 91, 95 and 98 RON.  
Diesel must fulfil the EN 590 or JIS K2204  
standards. The diesel engine fuel system is  
sensitive to contaminants, see page 181.  
Official fuel consumption figures are based  
on a standard driving cycle in accordance  
with EU Directive 80/1268 comb. Fuel con-  
sumption figures may change if the car is  
equipped with extra equipment that affects  
the car’s weight. The manner in which the car  
is driven and other non-technical factors can  
also affect fuel consumption. Consumption is  
higher and power output lower for fuel with  
an octane rating of 91 RON.  
• 91 RON must not be used for 4-cylinder  
engines and should only be used in  
exceptional cases with other engines.  
11  
• 95 RON can be used for normal driving.  
• 98 RON is recommended for optimum  
performance and minimum fuel  
consumption.  
When driving in temperatures above +38 ºC,  
fuel with the highest possible octane rating is  
recommended for optimum performance and  
fuel economy.  
NOTE  
Extreme weather conditions, towing a trailer  
or driving at high altitudes in combination  
with fuel grade are factors that could affect  
the car’s performance.  
Petrol – Norm EN 228.  
IMPORTANT  
Use only unleaded petrol to avoid damag-  
ing the catalytic converter. In order for the  
Volvo warranty to apply, never mix alcohol  
with petrol, the fuel system could be  
damaged.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
243  
11 Specifications  
Catalytic converter  
TM  
General  
Lambda-sond oxygen sensor  
The Lambda-sond is part of a control system  
intended to reduce emissions and improve  
fuel economy.  
The purpose of the catalytic converter is to  
purify exhaust gases. It is located in the flow  
of exhaust gases close to the engine so that  
it quickly reaches operating temperature. The  
catalytic converter consists of a monolith  
(ceramic or metal) with channels. The chan-  
nel walls are lined with a thin layer of plati-  
num, rhodium and palladium. These metals  
act as catalysts, i.e. they participate in and  
accelerate a chemical reaction without being  
used up themselves.  
An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen con-  
tent of the exhaust gases leaving the engine.  
This value is fed into an electronic system  
that continuously controls the injectors. The  
ratio of air to fuel is continuously adjusted.  
These adjustments create optimal condi-  
tions for efficient combustion, and together  
with the three-way catalytic converter reduce  
harmful emissions (hydrocarbons, carbon  
monoxide and nitrous oxides).  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
244  
11 Specifications  
Electrical system  
General  
12 volt system with a voltage-regulated alter-  
nator. Single pole system in which the chas-  
sis and engine block are used as conductors.  
Voltage  
12 V  
12 V  
12 V  
11  
1
2
Cold start capacity (CCA)  
590 A  
600 A  
700 A  
Reserve capacity (RC)  
Capacity (Ah)  
100 min  
60  
120 min  
70  
135 min  
80  
1
Car equipped with High Performance audio system.  
2
Car equipped with diesel engine, Keyless drive, audio system Premium Sound, fuel-driven  
heater or RTI.  
If the battery is changed, replace it with a  
battery of the same cold start capacity and  
reserve capacity as the original (see the decal  
on the battery).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
245  
11 Specifications  
Electrical system  
Bulbs  
Lighting  
Output W  
Type  
Dipped beam  
55  
55  
21  
21  
4
H7  
Main beam  
HB3  
Brake lights, reversing lamps, rear fog lamp  
Direction indicators, rear/front  
Rear position/parking lamps, rear side marker lamps  
P21W  
PY21W  
P21/4W  
C5W  
11  
Courtesy lighting, cargo area lighting, number plate  
lighting  
5
Vanity mirror  
1.2  
5
Tubular lamp  
W5W  
Front position/parking lamps, front side marker lamps  
Fog lamps  
55  
3
H11  
Glovebox lighting  
Tubular lamp  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
246  
11 Specifications  
Type approval  
Remote control system  
Country  
1
2
Delphi hereby certifies that this remote control  
system conforms to the essential characteristic  
requirements and other relevant regulations of  
directive 1999/5/EG.  
USA-FCC ID: KR55WK48952, KR55WK48964  
A, B, CY, CZ,  
D, DK, E, EST,  
F, FIN, GB, GR,  
H, I, IRL, L, LT,  
LV, M, NL, P,  
1
NOTE:  
This remote control system is in conformity with  
section 15 in the FCC Rules. The function refers  
to the following two conditions:  
11  
1. This system must not cause any harmful inter-  
ference.  
PL, S, SK, SLO  
2. This system accepts interference received,  
including interference that affects the system  
negatively.  
IS, LI, N, CH  
HR  
Important!  
Modifications to the system not approved by the  
manufacturer could lead to the remote control  
system ceasing to work.  
ROK  
BR  
Delphi 2003-07-15,  
Germany R-LPD1-03-0151  
Siemens VDO  
5WK48891  
Tested to conform with FCC characteristic  
requirements for use in a passenger car.  
2
RC  
ETC093LPD0155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
247  
Alphabetical index  
Approach light duration  
Bass speaker ............................................209  
Battery  
A
A/C  
active lamps .......................................... 59  
setting .................................................... 62  
Audio  
care ......................................................188  
jump starting ........................................140  
overload ...............................................117  
replacement .........................................189  
replacing the battery in the remote  
electronic climate control .......................70  
ABS ...........................................................128  
steering wheel keypad .......................... 53  
Audio volume  
ABS fault ................................................41  
Active Yaw Control ...................................130  
audio system ....................................... 207  
media player ........................................ 207  
Audio, see also Sound ............................. 207  
control ..................................................105  
symbols on the battery ........................188  
Blind spot (BLIS) .......................................135  
Additional heater .........................................73  
Adjustment, clock .......................................61  
AF – automatic frequency update .............214  
Air conditioning ...........................................66  
AUTO  
Bonnet ......................................................180  
Boot lid  
climate control settings ......................... 68  
preset storage ..................................... 211  
AUTO CLIMATE .......................................... 68  
ECC ........................................................68  
Air distribution .............................................71  
driving with open boot lid ....................116  
locking/unlocking ...........................97, 106  
Boot lid, mechanical opening ...................107  
Auto volume control ................................. 209  
Automatic car wash .................................. 170  
Automatic dimming .................................... 57  
Automatic gearbox ................................... 127  
ECC ........................................................70  
Air quality system, ECC ..............................69  
Brake fluid, checking and topping up .......185  
Brake lights .................................................47  
Brake system ....................................128, 185  
Brakes  
Air vents ......................................................67  
Airbag  
safety systems .................................... 126  
towing and recovery ............................ 138  
trailer ........................................... 141, 142  
Automatic locking ..................................... 108  
deactivation ............................................19  
driver’s and front passenger side ..........16  
Alarm  
brake lights ............................................47  
emergency brake light, EBL ..................47  
handbrake ..............................................55  
Bulb holder  
alarm light ............................................110  
alarm signals ........................................111  
arming ..................................................110  
automatic alarm activation ...................111  
deactivating a triggered alarm .............111  
disarming .............................................110  
general .................................................110  
testing the alarm system ......................113  
Alarm, radio functions ...............................212  
Automatic relocking .................................. 107  
Autostart ................................................... 119  
Average fuel consumption .......................... 49  
location of the bulbs ............................193  
number plate lighting ...........................194  
removal ................................................193  
Bulbs  
B
Backrest  
replacement .........................................190  
specifications .......................................246  
front seat, lowering ................................ 77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
248  
Alphabetical index  
safety equipment ................................... 28  
Cigarette lighter socket  
Control panel in driver’s door  
C
Call  
operation ................................................56  
Coolant, checking and topping up ...........184  
front seat ............................................... 45  
Clean inside and out ..................................... 8  
functions during an ongoing call ..........223  
Cooling system .........................................116  
Crash, see Collision ....................................22  
Cruise control .............................................52  
phone volume ......................................222  
Call waiting ................................................221  
Cleaning  
automatic car wash ............................. 170  
car wash .............................................. 170  
seatbelts .............................................. 172  
upholstery ............................................ 172  
Climate  
Calls  
D
making and receiving ...........................221  
Car care, leather upholstery ......................172  
Deadlocks .................................................109  
Car settings .................................................62  
Car upholstery ...........................................172  
Car wash ...................................................170  
Cargo area  
temporary deactivation ........................109  
temporary disconnection of alarm  
detectors ..............................................112  
Designation of dimensions .......................154  
personal preferences ............................. 61  
Climate control ........................................... 66  
Climate control settings  
AUTO ..................................................... 68  
Clock, adjustment ...................................... 61  
Diesel ........................................................181  
electrical socket .....................................92  
load retaining eyelets .............................92  
loading .................................................150  
Cargo separator ..........................................90  
engine preheater ....................................41  
Diesel filter ................................................181  
Closing the roof .......................................... 80  
Clutch fluid, checking and topping up ..... 185  
Coat hanger ................................................ 87  
Collision  
Diesel particle filter ...................................120  
Dimensions ...............................................233  
Dipped beam ........................................46, 48  
Direction indicators .....................................48  
Disc text ....................................................216  
Display  
Catalytic converter ....................................244  
recovery ...............................................138  
CD discs  
collision sensors .................................... 22  
crash mode ........................................... 27  
IC ........................................................... 22  
inflatable curtain .................................... 22  
Colour code, paint .................................... 173  
storage compartment ............................87  
CD functions .............................................215  
Checks  
messages .........................................43, 44  
Display lighting ............................................46  
fluids and oils ...............................179, 182  
Children  
Combined instrument panel ....................... 39  
Compass .................................................... 57  
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II .............206, 209  
Door mirror, position memory .....................59  
Door mirrors ................................................59  
child seats and airbags ..........................28  
child seats and side airbags ..................20  
position in car, table ...............................30  
calibration .............................................. 57  
Condensation ........................................... 181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
249  
Alphabetical index  
Driver’s door control panel .........................38  
Driving  
Emissions system  
Fluids, capacities ......................................241  
Fog lamps  
fault indicator ......................................... 41  
Engine ....................................................... 180  
adverse driving conditions ...................178  
cooling system .....................................116  
economical ...........................................116  
slippery driving conditions ...................116  
with open boot lid ................................116  
with trailer ............................................141  
Driving in water .........................................116  
on/off .....................................................47  
Frequency update, automatic ...................214  
Engine compartment ................................ 180  
Engine oil .................................................. 182  
Front seats  
capacities ............................ 238, 239, 240  
changing .............................................. 182  
driving under adverse driving  
easy entry ..............................................76  
lowering .................................................76  
seating position .....................................76  
Fuel  
conditions ............................................ 237  
filter ...................................................... 182  
oil grade ............................................... 237  
oil pressure ............................................ 42  
Engine specifications ............................... 235  
DSTC, see also Stability system  
consumption ....................................7, 242  
fuel consumption, display ......................49  
fuel economy .......................................158  
fuel filter ...............................................181  
fuel system ...........................................181  
level indicator .........................................41  
parking heater ........................................73  
refuelling ..............................................118  
Fuel gauge ..................................................39  
deactivating/activating .........................130  
symbol ...................................................41  
E
Entry, keyless ............................................. 62  
Environmental philosophy ............................ 7  
EON – Enhanced Other Networks ............ 214  
Equalizer ................................................... 209  
Expectant mothers  
Easy entry ...................................................76  
ECC .............................................................66  
ECC, electronic climate control ..................67  
ECO pressure  
Fuse table  
fuel economy .......................................158  
table .....................................................159  
Economical driving ....................................116  
safety ..................................................... 13  
fuses in the engine compartment ........198  
fuses in the passenger compartment ..201  
Fuses  
F
Fan  
Electrical socket  
changing ..............................................196  
general .................................................196  
relay/fuse box in the engine  
compartment .......................................197  
relay/fuse box in the passenger  
cargo area ..............................................92  
centre console .......................................45  
Electronic immobiliser .................................96  
ECC ....................................................... 68  
Fast-wind .................................................. 216  
First aid ....................................................... 87  
Floor mats .................................................. 77  
Fluids and oils  
Emergency calls ........................................219  
Emission control ...........................................7  
Emissions ..................................................242  
carbon dioxide .....................................243  
compartment .......................................200  
checks ......................................... 179, 182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
250  
Alphabetical index  
IMEI number ............................................. 224  
Immobiliser ......................................... 96, 121  
"Important!" texts ......................................... 6  
Incoming calls .......................................... 221  
Information display ..................................... 43  
Infotainment  
Keyless drive .............................................102  
G
starting the car .....................................122  
Keyless entry ..............................................62  
Gearbox  
automatic .............................................127  
Kick-down  
manual .................................................123  
Global opening ..........................................106  
automatic gearbox ...............................126  
L
Glovebox .....................................................87  
menus .................................................. 206  
Instrument lighting ................................ 46, 47  
locking ..................................................101  
Gross vehicle weight .................................234  
Lambda-sond ...........................................244  
Leather upholstery, washing  
instructions ...............................................172  
Instrument overview  
H
left-hand drive ............................... 34, 218  
right-hand drive ..................................... 36  
Interior lighting ............................................ 84  
Lighting .......................................................84  
Handbrake ..................................................55  
Hanging light garments ...............................87  
Hatch cover .................................................80  
Hatch for long loads ....................................92  
Hazard warning flashers .............................54  
Headlamp pattern .....................................151  
Headlamps  
automatic lighting, dipped beam ...........46  
automatic lighting, passenger  
Interior rearview mirror ............................... 57  
Intermittent wiping ...................................... 50  
ISOFIX  
compartment .........................................84  
bulb replacement, general ...................190  
bulbs, specifications ............................246  
dipped beam ..........................................46  
display lighting .......................................46  
exterior ...................................................46  
front fog lamps ......................................47  
headlamp levelling .................................46  
homesafe light duration ...................48, 59  
instrument lighting .................................46  
lighting panel .........................................46  
main/dipped beam .................................48  
position/parking lamps ..........................46  
rear fog lamp .........................................47  
rear seat .................................................84  
fixture system ........................................ 31  
J
headlamp washers .................................50  
Off/On ....................................................46  
Heating  
Jack .......................................................... 160  
Jump starting ........................................... 140  
K
front seats ..............................................70  
Homesafe light duration ........................48, 59  
Kerb weight .............................................. 234  
setting ....................................................62  
Key ............................................................. 97  
I
keyless lock and ignition system ......... 102  
remote control ....................................... 96  
Key blade  
IDIS ...........................................................219  
Ignition keys ..............................................121  
active locks ........................................... 99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
251  
Alphabetical index  
Lighting, bulb replacement  
Lowering, roof ............................................ 79  
Lubricants, capacities .............................. 241  
O
cargo area ............................................194  
courtesy lighting ...................................194  
dipped beam ........................................191  
direction indicators ..............................192  
fog lamp ...............................................193  
front ......................................................190  
location of the bulbs in the bulb  
Oil, see also Engine oil  
M
oil pressure ............................................42  
Opening the roof .........................................80  
Main beam .................................................. 48  
Outside temperature gauge ........................39  
Oxyhydrogen gas ......................................140  
Off/On .................................................... 46  
switching and flashing ........................... 48  
Maintenance  
P
holder ...................................................193  
main beam ...........................................191  
parking lamps ......................................192  
position lamps ......................................192  
rear lamp ..............................................193  
side marker lamps ................................192  
vanity mirror .........................................195  
Lights  
rustproofing ......................................... 174  
self-maintenance ................................. 179  
Making calls .............................................. 221  
PACOS ........................................................18  
Paint  
Manual gearbox ........................................ 123  
Menu structure  
paintwork damage and touching up ....173  
Paintwork  
colour code ..........................................173  
Panels, lighting ............................................84  
media player ........................................ 217  
phone, menu options .......................... 226  
phone, overview .................................. 225  
Menus  
Parking assistance ....................................132  
main beam "flash" ..................................48  
Loading  
sensors for parking assistance ............134  
Parking brake ........................................42, 55  
audio system ....................................... 206  
Messages in the information display .......... 43  
cargo area ..............................................92  
general .................................................150  
load capacity ........................................150  
Loading assistance .....................................90  
Parking heater  
Misting  
battery and fuel ......................................73  
general ...................................................72  
parking on a hill .....................................72  
time setting ............................................73  
Parking lamps .............................................46  
removing with defroster function .......... 69  
timer function, ECC ............................... 69  
treating the windows ............................. 66  
Loading, error messages ............................81  
Locking .....................................................106  
from inside ...........................................108  
from outside .........................................106  
unlocking ..............................................106  
Long loads ..................................................92  
N
Passenger compartment filter ....................66  
Personal preferences ..................................61  
NEWS ....................................................... 213  
News broadcast ....................................... 213  
"Note" texts .................................................. 6  
approach light duration .........................62  
auto blower adjust .................................61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
252  
Alphabetical index  
automatic locking ...................................62  
doors unlock ..........................................62  
homesafe light duration .........................62  
keyless entry ..........................................62  
lock confirm, light ...................................62  
recirculation timer ..................................61  
unlock confirm, light ...............................62  
Petrol grade ..............................................243  
Remote control ...........................................96  
R
functions ................................................97  
keyless drive ........................................102  
replacing the battery ............................105  
Remote control system, type approval .....247  
Radio  
radio settings ....................................... 211  
radio stations ....................................... 211  
Radio text ................................................. 214  
Reverse gear inhibitor  
Rain sensor ................................................. 51  
Random, CD and audio files .................... 216  
RDS functions .......................................... 212  
five-speed ............................................123  
six-speed, petrol ..................................124  
Roof, lowering .............................................79  
Phone ........................................................220  
calling from the phone book ................223  
On/Off ..................................................221  
standby mode ......................................221  
steering wheel keypad ...........................53  
text input ..............................................222  
Phone book  
Rustproofing .............................................174  
resetting .............................................. 214  
Rearview mirrors  
S
compass ................................................ 57  
door ....................................................... 59  
electrically retractable ........................... 59  
interior ................................................... 57  
Recirculation  
Safety ..........................................................12  
safety systems, table .............................26  
SCAN  
handling numbers ................................222  
Phone system ...........................................218  
CD and audio files ...............................216  
radio stations .......................................212  
Seat  
ECC ....................................................... 69  
Recovery .................................................. 138  
PI seek ......................................................214  
Polishing ....................................................171  
Position lamps ............................................46  
Power seat ..................................................77  
Refrigerant .................................................. 66  
Refuelling  
power seat .............................................77  
Seatbelt .......................................................12  
pregnancy ..............................................13  
rear seat .................................................13  
Seatbelt reminder .......................................13  
fuel cap ................................................ 118  
refuelling .............................................. 118  
Refuse calls .............................................. 221  
Power steering fluid, checking and  
topping up .................................................186  
Power windows ...........................................56  
Privacy locking ..........................................100  
Programme functions ................................212  
PTY – Programme type .............................213  
Putting calls on hold .................................221  
Seats  
REG – Regional radio programmes .......... 214  
Relay/fuse box  
lowering the front backrest ....................77  
manual setting .......................................76  
Service programme ..................................178  
in the engine compartment ................. 197  
in the passenger compartment ........... 200  
Settings, see Personal preferences ............61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
253  
Alphabetical index  
Side airbags ................................................20  
SIM card ....................................................219  
SIPS bags ...................................................20  
Ski hatch .....................................................92  
SMS  
Starting from cold  
T
automatic gearbox .............................. 127  
Starting the engine ................................... 119  
Tachometer .................................................39  
Tank volume .............................................242  
Temperature  
keyless drive ........................................ 122  
STC ........................................................... 130  
actual temperature .................................67  
passenger compartment, electronic  
Steering lock ............................................. 121  
Steering wheel  
read ......................................................224  
write .....................................................224  
Soot filter .............................................44, 120  
climate control .......................................70  
Ticket clip ....................................................87  
adjustment ............................................. 54  
cruise control ......................................... 52  
keypad ................................................. 220  
keypad left-hand side ............................ 52  
keypad right-hand side ......................... 53  
Steering wheel keypad  
SOOT FILTER FULL ..................................120  
Sound  
Timer  
ECC .......................................................69  
Towbar, see Towing equipment ...............143  
audio settings .......................................207  
audio source ........................................207  
Spare wheel ..............................................160  
Towing ......................................................138  
Towing equipment  
phone/audio .......................................... 53  
Stone chips and scratches ....................... 173  
Temporary spare ..................................156  
Speed classes, tyres .................................154  
general .................................................143  
installation ............................................145  
removing ..............................................148  
specifications .......................................144  
Towing eye ................................................139  
Storage compartment ................................ 86  
Speed dial .................................................223  
Speedometer ..............................................39  
Spin Control ..............................................130  
SRS system  
CD discs ................................................ 87  
rear side panels ..................................... 87  
Storage spaces in the passenger  
compartment .............................................. 86  
TP – traffic information ..............................212  
Traction control system ............................130  
Traffic information .....................................212  
Trailer  
general ...................................................17  
switch .....................................................19  
Stability control system .............................130  
Storing stations, manual and automatic ... 211  
Subwoofer ................................................ 209  
Surround ........................................... 206, 209  
Symbols .................................................... 131  
Stability system  
cable ....................................................143  
driving with a trailer .............................141  
trailer weight ........................................234  
Trip computer .............................................49  
indication ................................................41  
Stains ........................................................172  
indicator symbols .................................. 41  
warning symbols ................................... 40  
Standby mode, phone ..............................221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
254  
Alphabetical index  
Trip meter ....................................................39  
Tuning .......................................................211  
Type approval, remote control system .....247  
Type designation .......................................232  
Tyre  
Volume  
auto volume control ............................ 209  
phone/media player ............................ 222  
programme types ................................ 214  
Volume, see also Audio volume ............... 207  
Windscreen wipers and washers ................50  
Winter driving ............................................120  
Winter tyres ...............................................155  
Wiper blades  
replacement .........................................187  
W
pressure ...............................................158  
Tyres  
Warning lamp  
designation of dimensions ...................154  
direction of rotation ..............................157  
driving characteristics ..........................154  
ECO pressure .......................................159  
general .................................................154  
speed classes ......................................154  
summer and winter wheels ..................157  
tread wear indicators ...........................155  
winter tyres ..........................................155  
stability and traction control system ... 130  
Warning symbol, airbag system ................. 15  
"Warning!" texts ........................................... 6  
Warning triangle ....................................... 160  
Washer fluid, topping up .......................... 184  
Washers  
windscreen and headlamps .................. 50  
Washing the car ........................................ 170  
U
Waxing ...................................................... 171  
Wheels  
Unlocking  
fitting ................................................... 163  
removal ................................................ 162  
rims ...................................................... 156  
Whiplash injury WHIPS ............................... 23  
boot lid .................................................106  
from inside ...........................................108  
from outside .........................................106  
keyless .................................................106  
settings ..................................................62  
WHIPS ........................................................ 23  
child seat/booster cushion .................... 23  
Wind deflector ............................................ 83  
V
Vehicle data ..............................................178  
Windscreen wipers  
Ventilation ...................................................67  
rain sensor ............................................. 51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
255  
Volvo Car Corporation TP 9198 (English), AT 0720, Printed in Sweden, Göteborg 2007, Copyright © 2000-2007 Volvo Car Corporation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Telex Headphones HR 2 User Manual
Texas Instruments Network Card Adpater User Manual
Timex Heart Rate Monitor M503 User Manual
Toshiba All in One Printer e STUDIO163 User Manual
TP Link Network Router TDW8910g User Manual
Trango Broadband Network Router Atlas5010 User Manual
TRENDnet Network Card TEW 623PI User Manual
Tripp Lite TV Cables P106 06I User Manual
Tyco Home Security System Power608 User Manual
Weber Griddle 55548 User Manual